ALBERT R. MANN
LIBRARY

NEW York STATE COLLEGES
OF
AGRICULTURE AND HoME EcoNoMICS

CORNELL UNIVERSITY

was University Library
QR 145.W

iin

Cornell University

Library

The original of this book is in
the Cornell University Library.

There are no known copyright restrictions in
the United States on the use of the text.

http://www.archive.org/details/cu31924003216052

PATHOLOGICAL MYCOLOGY.

PATHOLOGICAL
MYCOLOGY.

AN ENQUIRY INTO THE ETIOLOGY OF INFECTIVE
DISEASES,

ia BY
G. SIMS WOODHEAD, M.D. F_BCP.Es,,

ASSISTANT TO THE PROFESSOR OF PATHOLOGY IN THE UNIVERSITY OF EDINBURGH}
PATHOLOGIST TO THE ROYAL HOSPITAL FOR SICK CHILDREN, EDINBURGH ;
LATE PRESIDENT OF THE ROYAL MEDICAL SOCIETY;

AND

ARTHUR W. HARE, M.B., C.M.,

ASSISTANT TO THE PROFESSOR OF SURGERY IN THE UNIVERSITY OF EDINBURGH:
LATE PRESIDENT OF THE ROYAL MEDICAL SOCIETY.

SECTION 1—-METHODS.

WITH SIXTY ILLUSTRATIONS.

EDINBURGH:
YOUNG J. PENTLAND.
1885.

EDINBURGH ! PRINTED BY SCOTT AND FERGUSON, AND BURNESS AND COMPANY,

PRINTERS TO HER MAJESTY,

[All rights reserved.|

PREP ACE,

In the following pages it has been the Authors’ endeavour to place
clearly and succinctly before their readers the methods employed in
the examination and cultivation of Micro-Organisms, especially of
those that are supposed to have any relation to disease.

Their object in so doing is twofold: first, to supply to the
worker in the field of Scientific Medicine a handy guide, to which
reference may be made for instruction and details which can other-
wise be obtained only from scattered papers and treatises in various
languages ; second, to show how extremely simple are most of the
methods of research, and thus encourage, as they themselves have
been encouraged, young Pathologists to work in a domain, which
daily, = it yields new facts to the patient explorer, discloses greater
potentialities. ‘

They know how difficult it is for the busy practitioner to devote
time to work which, though simple in its details, requires close
and continued attention; but they would point out that artificial
cultures are easily made, that tissues may be readily preserved for
examination, and that those who devote themselves to the subject
are usually ready to supply the materials for these cultures, and to
conduct the further necessary examination. As the writers have for
some years been endeavouring to collect material and statistics in

connection with the subject of the relations of Micro-Organisms to

vi PREFACE.

Medical and Surgical Diseases, they now venture to express their
willingness to supply materials for making artificial cultures, and to
report on material sent to them for examination.

They desire to record their sense of indebtedness to the officials
of the German Imperial Board of Health Laboratories, to. whose
assistance and courteous interest they owe their first acquaintance
with many of the facts contained in this section.

They have also to acknowledge the valuable assistance of Mr. J.
Tatham Thompson, F.R.M.S., whose exact delineations of microscopic
and naked eye appearances have greatly enhanced the value of the
descriptive portions of the work ; and at the same time they heartily
thank Mr. W. B. Mackay, M.B., M.R.C.S., for several valuable
drawings.

The drawings not initialed are copied from photographs taken for

the purpose.

UNIVERSITY OF EDINBURGH,
June 1885.

CONTENTS.

CHAPTER I.

INTRODUCTORY.
PAGE
General Aspects—True Position of the Subject—Relations of Micro-.

Organisms to the Tissues—Means of Ingress—Action on Tissues—
Acute Abscess—Tubercle—Tissue Reaction—Digestive Ferments—
Specific Differences of Action—Selective Affinities—Mutability of
Species + Modification of Function — Requirements of Micro-
Organisms—Germs—Conditions necessary to Investigation, ‘ I

CHAPTER IL
METHODS OF EXAMINATION.

Chemical Reagents — Baumgarten’s Method — Recognition of Micro-
Organisms—Staining Reagents—Gram’s Method of Staining—Stains
for Special Bacilli—Methods of Staining Tubercle Bacilli—Sources
of Error in Observation—Examination of “ Fresh” Preparations—
His’s Method of Staining and Washing — Hardening of Tissues—
Method of Illumination—Photography—List of Apparatus and
Reagents--Summary of Process of Examination of Fluids or Tissues
for Micro-Organisms, : : : F 24

CHAPTER IIL
SOLID CULTIVATION MEDIA.

Nutrient Soils—Cultivation on Sterilised Potatoes—Inoculation of Potatoes
—Cultivation on Sterile Bread Paste—Inoculation of Bread Paste—
Summary of Process for preparing Sterile Bread Paste—Cultivation
in Sterile Nutrient Jelly—Peptonised Meat Jelly— Summary of Pro-
cess for preparing Sterile Nutrient Jelly—Methods of employing
Sterile Nutrient Jelly; in Test-Tubes; in Capsules, for testing Air
—Examination of Water for Micro-Organisms—Cultivation in Sterile
Agar-Agar Mixture—Cultivation on Sterilised Solidified Blood
Serum—Summary of Process for preparing Sterilised Blood Serum—

Method of Inoculation, z 4 - 7 - y 55

vill CONTENTS.

_ CHAPTER IV.
LIQUID CULTIVATING MEDIA.

Animal Infusions — Buchner’s Fluid—Urine — Milk — Blood Serum—
Cheese Infusion— Vegetable Infusions—Artificial Solutions : Raulin’s
Fluid, Pasteur’s Fluid, Cohn’s Fluid, Miquel’s Fluid—Lister’s Flask
—Aitken’s Test-Tube—Sternberg’s Bulb—Incubation,

CHAPTER V.
SEPARATION OF MICRO-ORGANISMS FROM THE TISSUES.

From Living Tissues—From Dead Tissues,

APPENDIX A.

Penicillium Glaucum—Genus Aspergillus—Mucor—Penospora—Torula—
Bacteridze — Bacilli— Micrococci — Pyogenetic Micrococci—List of
Antiseptic Substances,

APPENDIX B.

LITERATURE.
PAGE

Actinomyces, . 4 : . 132 | Malaria,
Anthrax, . ‘i u . 133 | Methods,
Antiseptics, é : . 136 | Micro-Organisms in Air,
Bacteria, Coloured, . - . 139 | Micro-Organisms in Living Tissues,
Charbon, . . ‘ . 133 | Osteo-Myelitis, .
Cholera, . ‘ A . 139 | Pneumonia,
Diphtheria, : : ‘ . 140 | Putrefaction,
Diseases of Animals — Swine Pyzemia, ‘

Plague, Glanders, Pleuro- Spirocheta Denticola, %

Pneumonia, &c. . . 41 59 Obermeyeri,
Erysipelas, 142 | Spontaneous Generation, .
Fermentation, . : . 143 | Syphilis,
General Literature, - 146 | Tuberculosis,
Gonorrhea, . - 148 | Typhoid and Typhus,
Wydrophobia, . . 148 | Ulcerative Endocarditis,
Leprosy, . : : : - 149 | Vaccinia, .

PAGE

106

117

I21

149
150
150
151
152
152
143
153
160
160
160
148
161
165
165
166

LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS.

. Pus from an Acute Abscess at time of Evacuation,

. Anthrax Bacillus in a case of Splenic Fever,

. Blood taken from a case of Traumatic Tetanus,

. Blood of a Mouse killed by Mouse-Septiczemia,

. Bacillus anthracis, stained by Gram’s Method,

. Bacilli in Mucous Membrane of small Intestine (Typhoid),
» Micrococci from Sputum in a case of Acute Pneumonia during the Early

Stage, :

. Section of ee" Tubercle,

. Tubercle Bacilli in Sputa,

. Pair of Spring Forceps with Platinum Points,

. His’s Method of washing off Extra Stain,

. Narrow-mouthed Bottle fitted with Funnel Filter,

. Diagram to show method of washing off Extra Stain, .

. ** Steam Steriliser,” .

. Bacillus anthracis growing on Sterilised Potato,

. Link Torula growing on Sterilised Potato,

. Glass Dish and Bell for Sterilised Potatoes, 3

. Micrococcus of Acute Osteo-Myelitis growing on Sterilised Potato,
. Growth of Micrococcus prodigiosus on Sterilised Potato,

. Method of dividing Sterilised Potatoes,

. Platinum Wires used for making Inoculations,

. Inoculation of Potatoes,

. Mucor Lichtheimti growing on Bread Dissta,

. Aspergillus albus growing on Bread Paste, 5

. Aspergillus repens growing on Bread Paste—commencing growth,
. Aspergillus repens growing on Bread Paste (extension of surface of growth

causing Undulations),

. Inoculation of Bread Paste,

. Aspergillus nigrescens growing on Bee Paste,

. Micrococcus of Osteo-Myelitis growing on Bread Paste,
. Black Zorala growing on Bread Paste,

. Screw-Press for extracting Meat Infusion,

. Hot Water Funnel for filtering Meat Jelly,

b

PAGE

28
30
33
34
36
37

38
41
42
43
47
51
54
57
58
59
59
60
61
61
62
63
64
65
66

67
68
69
7O
71
73
74

LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS.

- Hot Air Chamber for sterilising Wadding, Glass, and other Apparatus,
. Method of Inoculation in Test-Tubes containing Nutrient Jelly,

. Growth of Violet Bacillus in Nutrient Jelly,

. Fluorescing Bacillus growing in Nutrient Jelly,

. Cultivation of 2. anthracis in Nutrient Jelly, :
. Cultivation in Nutrient Jelly of Micrococcus found in Osteo-Myelitis, .
. Cultivation of Pink Yeast in Nutrient Jelly,

. Cultivation of Micrococci (Yellow) found in Vaccine Lymph,

. Organism of the Rabbit Septiczemia (Bacillus),

. Cultivation of Micrococci (White) found in Vaccine Lymph,

. Impure Cultivation of &. anthracis in Nutrient Jelly,

. Growth of Bacterium termo and Penicillia in Nutrient Jelly,

. Apparatus for determining relative Purity of Atmosphere (Qualitative),
. From a Photograph of Glass Capsule exposed in St. Giles’ Cathedral,

Edinburgh,

. Hesse’s Apparatus for decauliens relative Purity of Atmospheres (Quali-

tative and Quantitative),

. Apparatus for determining relative Purity of Watea
. London Waters, with 80 per cent. Distilled Water added to Gelatine

Sugar and Sodium Phosphate,

. London Waters added to Gelatine Sugar and ae Sha tiate,

. Jar for collecting Blood, ,
. ‘Slow Steriliser,” for Sterilising Blood Serum ‘ey Tyndall's Method,
. Slow Steriliser for Blood Serum,

. Serum Inspissator or Thermostat, with two Test-Tubes in pettus

. Tubercle Bacillus cultivated upon Solid Serum in Test-Tube, .

. Tubercle Bacillus upon Solid Serum,

. Lister’s Flask,

. Aitken’s Test-Tube,

. Sternberg’s Bulb,

. Incubator,

PAGE

77
80

81
81
82
83
84
84
85
85
86
87
88

89

gl!
93

95
95
98
99
100
Tol
104
104,
1Iz
113
114
115

PATHOLOGICAL MYCOLOGY.

‘

PATHOLOGICAL MYCOLOGY.

CHAPTER I.
INTRODUCTORY.

GENERAL ASPECTS.

1. Since the theory of spontaneous generation has been abandoned,
through the classic researches of Cagniard-Latour and Schwann
at the one extreme, and the more recent investigations of Pasteur,
Lister, and Koch at the other, the various groups of the organised
ferments have become endowed with an interest far greater than any
with which they might be invested from their merely biological aspect.
They have assumed an almost vital importance from the fact that many
of them are now believed to play a prominent part in the causation of
certain morbid conditions, both in plants and throughout the whole
animal world; and they have come to be recognised as most im-
portant factors in such conditions,—factors which must be carefully
accounted for in our consideration of many pathological processes,
factors which have been studied closely in connection with certain
pathological and clinical phenomena, and which not only help to
explain these phenomena, but in some cases furnish the only reliable
explanation. ‘That these organised ferments—or micro-organisms, as
they are termed—do occur in very intimate relation to certain infective
diseases has never been doubted, since the means of their recognition
have been at our command. A serious discussion has arisen, how-
ever, as to whether the presence of these micro-organisms is indica-
tive of a causal or a purely accidental relation between them and the
morbid phenomena which appear in their host. In no scientific

A

2 PATHOLOGICAL MYCOLOGY.

problem has the building of hypotheses on other than the basis of
exact observation been more discredited, and the principle more firmly
established that the only rational method of search for any cause is
the close scrutiny of effects, within the confines of which the cause
must necessarily be traced. It thus happens that this discussion has
been already limited in many directions by the results of careful
investigation of all the circumstances which occur in such cases; and
it is now held to be indisputable that in certain forms of disease
micro-organisms do play the part of the exciting cause. It is of
paramount importance to note what have been the means employed
in attaining this result, and to inquire whether the same principles
applied to the investigation of other diseases in which micro-organisms
occur may not lead to a more distinct and accurate conception of
their real significance. In so doing it will be found necessary to
enter somewhat minutely into details connected with the vital
peculiarities of these lowly organised forms, and to describe in order
those methods of cultivation and observation which the experience
of specialists in this domain of science has pointed out as the
simplest and most effectual means of becoming acquainted with their
more important characteristics.

TRUE POSITION OF THE SUBJECT.

2. Hitherto the work has been carried on by experts only, and the
medical profession has been divided into two distinct, but equally
illogical, factions. There seems to be a general disposition on the
one hand to ‘‘ pooh-pooh” the very name of micro-organism, whilst on
the other there is only too good an example of excessive zeal. The
former section scouts the notion of any connection, direct or indirect,
relative or absolute, between micro-organisms and disease, of what-
ever nature. The members of this section have usually had, but
scant opportunity of studying the evidence now at our disposal,
and still less have they tried to settle the matter by a thorough
personal investigation. The whole matter is summed up by them
as a prevailing “ medical fashion,” and is cast aside as utterly un-
worthy of serious consideration. The second section, it is much to
be feared, has in great measure to answer for this antagonism. Its

RELATIONS TO TISSUES. 3

members read the current literature, they quote experiments, excel-
lently planned and carefully carried out by the originator, to prove
theories which in the mind of the originator never came to birth.
They use the bacillus indiscriminately, they make it the “ be all and
end all” of disease. If a bacillus or a micrococcus is found, they
search no further, they are fully convinced, and all pathological
processes may be included in this single word ‘“‘ micro-organism.” It is
not by such work and such reasoning that the position now attained
has been won; no brilliant flash of genius alone has cast the present
flood of light upon the relations of germs to disease. Patient
observation, carried on by a few ardent and enthusiastic workers,
and the gradual and tedious accumulation of facts, combined with
careful and sound deductions, alone could place the ‘‘ germ theory
of disease” upon its present solid and logical basis. Solid and logical
as this basis is, it must still be amplified in many directions. The
work carried on, up to the present by the few, must now be taken up
by the whole medical profession, or by as many as are anxious to deter-
mine the true position of the question. The amount of material at
command is enormous; the methods have gradually been so simplified
that the busiest practitioner may help in the work, and by so doing
disabuse his mind of many exaggerated notions as to what is actually
proved and held by our modern authorities as to the relations
between micro-organisms and disease—in the first place generally, and
secondly in certain specific diseases.

RELATIONS OF MICRO-ORGANISMS TO THE TISSUES.

3. It cannot be too strongly insisted upon at the outset that the pre-
sence of a micro-organism in the body, or in one of the cavities of the
. body, may have not the slightest significance from an etiological point
of view. We are covered with them, the respiratory and alimentary
tracts are loaded with them, and it is not wonderful, therefore, that
we should be able to detect their presence on these surfaces. If this
fact is borne in mind, and when the numerous means of entrance
by way of the free surfaces, cutaneous, intestinal, &c., are considered,
one is inclined to marvel that they are not normally present in
enormous numbers in the deeper tissues, and that they are present only

4 PATHOLOGICAL MYCOLOGY.

under certain abnormal conditions. The invasion of the living body
by micro-organisms is a subject which presents great difficulties as to
its rationale, and as to the exact manner in which it takes place.
In regard to the factors which seem to militate against their entry,
Lister has pointed out that the chief peculiarity of the tissues, in this
direction, is their vitality. In normal conditions the ingress and pro-
gress of micro-organisms are checked by the direct vital reaction of
the tissue elements themselves. He further insists that not only is
this the case as regards healthy surfaces and the deeper tissues, but
that two perfectly healthy mucous membranes or fresh cut surfaces,
when brought into close apposition, will prevent the development be-
tween them, and even the entrance of micro-organisms—an explana-
tion consequent upon the phenomena observed in the urethra, and in
connection with healing by first intention, Tissues, then, of what
may be termed a Standard Vitality, resist perfectly the entrance of
the invading organisms ; but let this standard be but’ to the least
extent lowered, and the chance of an invasion at once becomes great.
The question is one of intricate physico-chemical relations between the
organisms and the tissue elements of their host, which we cannot at
present define more exactly than in the preceding general terms.
But in. looking to the conditions and duration of the invasions them-
selves, many other points can be established. If it be admitted that
this theory of Standard Vitality is correct, it follows, that under normal
conditions these minute organisms would be continually excluded from
the tissues of the body; but, unfortunately for us, there are acting con-
stantly certain very powerful allies of these micro-organisms, through
whose aid the vitality of the tissues is lowered. The general vitality
of the body may be depressed by cold, want of food, want of sleep,
and irregular habits. Even fear, anger, or other strong emotion may
act in the same way by altering both secreting tissue and secretions,
thus interfering with the proper nutrition of the tissues, and lowering
their vitality.

Means OF INGRESS.

4, Further, in the altered secretions, micro-organisms normally
present may be able to multiply much more rapidly than in the normal
secretions, or certain varieties which are not usually present, or are

MEANS OF INGRESS. 5

present only in inconsiderable numbers, may make their appearance in
enormous masses, often to the exclusion of those usually found. This
is especially the case where, in addition to altered secretion, there is
imperfect removal of excreta. Hence even mechanical conditions
may have considerable influence in determining the reactions of the
tissues and the micro-organisms upon one another, as constrictions,
pouches, cavities, and wounds, internal or external, may, any of them,
give rise to an accumulation of fluids or excreta which act, firstly, by
weakening the tissues, and, secondly, by affording nidus and pabulum
to organisms, which, without such a resting-place, could find no base
of operations even upon the weakened tissues. The importance of
the structural peculiarities of a part in relation to its power of resis-
tance against the attack of micro-organisms, can only be fully appre-
ciated after a careful consideration of these peculiarities. The
structure, function, and arrangement of the epithelium covering the
surface, the position of the surface, and its relations, first, to the
external world, and, second, to the deeper tissues, especially to the
lymphatics, the number, size and relations of these lymphatics, the
tissues in which they occur, the density, vascularity and vitality of
these tissues, and the relations of the lymphatics to the small veins,
are, amongst others, points to which special attention must be paid.
If tuberculosis be regarded as a specific infective disease, due
to the presence and activity of a certain minute organism, how is it
that certain individuals are attacked whilst others escape, that in those
attacked the organ most frequently assailed is the lung, and that the
selective process passes even further, and that the apex of the lung
is specially affected? We can readily understand that the mouth,
fauces, trachea, and air passages generally are not affected, because
there is a continual emptying of these cavities, a constant ebb and
flow of air, and also of the materials which this air carries with it,
keeping up a state of unrest—a state which is fatal to the growth of
most micro-organisms. This tidal change extends to all parts of the
lung where there are proper expansion and contraction, which, as
pointed out by the older physicians, fails first at the apex, the position
in which phthisis commences. In children, where there has been
great enlargement of a bronchial gland, or where, from any other
cause, there has been pressure upon a bronchus passing to one of the

6 PATHOLOGICAL MYCOLOGY.

lower parts of the lung, the tuberculosis appears in the area in which,
owing to the obstruction of the bronchus, there is imperfect entrance
and exit of the air, in which, in consequence, there is an accumulation,
not only of what enters, but of what should normally escape
Should a so-called tubercle bacillus effect an entrance, it has every-
thing in its favour. It is not readily dislodged, it is at rest, it is sup-
plied with ample food stuff, it has an altered epithelial surface on
which to act, and it is on a surface between which and the neighbour-
ing lymphatics there is the closest communication. On the other
hand, in the respiratory tract, in addition to the above-mentioned
conditions, there is in the mouth a thick layer of squamous epithelium
which can withstand the attacks of the most vigorous bacillus (unless
it develops with extreme rapidity), and so act as a barrier against the
entrance of the bacillus into the lymphatics. In the lower parts of the
respiratory tubes the epithelial barrier consists of well-formed ciliated
columnar cells, the function of which is to pass on from one to another,
along with mucus and other material, the bacillus which is seeking
lodgment for long enough time to be able to develop morphologically
and physiologically, and invasion in this locality is prevented. We
shall return to the tubercle bacillus for further illustration and
comparison.

ACTION ON TISSUES.

5. If it be granted, for the sake of argument, that the germ theory of
disease is correct, in what way is it possible to account for the varied
changes, local or general, by which an organism manifests its presence ?

In certain cases we have an organism whose influence on the

‘system of its host is purely of a local nature, being itself circum-
scribed in its area of invasion, beyond which neither the organism
itself nor its products have any effect. Of such a class the soft
sore virus may be taken asa type. On the other hand, there may
be strict limitation of the organism to a definite area or tract, beyond
which it cannot penetrate, whilst its influence in the form of irritative
products may extend throughout the invaded organisation, often with
the gravest results. Such a class is represented in all probability by
the organisms present in cases of septicaemia. In a third class,
the organism is not limited in its sphere of activity, but penetrates

ACTION ON TISSUES—ABSCESS. 7

to all parts of the tissues of its host, carrying its irritative pro-
perties with it, and producing a general disease which puts to the
test the vitality of the affected organisation as a whole. To this
class belong the organisms which produce the very varied symptoms
met with in the specific fevers. In any of these cases the direct rela-
tion of the micro-organism to the tissue elements of its host is probably
adual one. In the first place, the mere fact of its presence as a
foreign body amongst the tissues gives it the character of a mechanical
irritant. In addition, it may be that one of its vital peculiarities is to
evolve an irritating product or pfomaine, which, in virtue of its
chemical constitution, either irritates the adjacent tissues, in which it
may produce a local necrosis, or, as in certain cases, its poisonous
effects are spread through the whole of the tissues of the body. It
may be that there is, in addition to these two methods of irritation,
a more subtle influence exerted by the organism upon the tissue
elements of its host, a physico-chemical or molecular reaction occur-
ring between the two, which gives rise to local or to general changes.

AcuTE ABSCESS—TUBERCLE.

6. The marked difference which exists, and which is much greater
than at first sight appears, comes into bold relief if the stages in the
formation of an acute abscess are observed on the one hand, and those
of tubercle formation on the other. In the case of an acute abscess,
an indurated mass of tissue is first noticed. If this be punctured, no
pus escapes; the tissue reaction has not yet reached the stage of pus
formation, but a drop of perfectly clear serum exudes from the centre
of the mass. On examination this is found to consist of a few lymph
‘cells and immense hosts of chain or cluster-forming micrococci float-
ing in the lymph. If this puncture be repeated in twenty-four hours
pus is found to be present in small quantities, loaded with the same
organisms. If repeated punctures be made at intervals, an increased
quantity of pus is found each time, and the organisms from the com-
mencement of pus formation begin to decrease, till, in an old abscess
of some weeks’ standing, no living micro-organisms are present; but
the pus is found to contain dead micrococci, not readily recognisable,
as they are partially broken down and take on staining reactions very

8 PATHOLOGICAL MYCOLOGY.,

feebly. The reason of this sequence of phenomena is, that after
attaining their maximum degree of development in a locally devitalised
portion of tissue, the micrococci are prevented from further progress
by the zone of fully vitalised tissue around ; and the powerful vital
reaction in this zone hems in the organisms on every side, and at the
same time limits the formation of pus to the centre of the affected
locality. The micrococci soon exhaust all the supplies of pabu-
lum at their command, and then rapidly die out, being in many
cases destroyed by their own effete products in the pus ; and in pus
taken from long unopened abscesses they have quite disappeared.
Thus the presence of micrococci in the tissues precedes the reaction-
ary changes to which they give rise locally in the case of acute
abscesses. It is an easy enough matter to say that the tissues in
which the abscess formed had been devitalised by a blow or by
exposure to cold. Either of these, or both, may be cited as the
cause, but how do the micro-organisms come to be present in the
body? Have the altered conditions of internal surfaces nothing to do
with this? Have altered secretions and accumulations of excreta
played no part in the introduction of the foreign organism? In fact,
under the above conditions, have not numerous organisms from time
to time been introduced into the tissues, but so long as the vitality
of these tissues was above a certain standard, the “germs” were
paralysed or destroyed, and no harm resulted? In those conditions,
however, in which abscess formation is met with, these organisms
have sought out the devitalised point and have attacked it, and
there is a contest between the weakened tissue and the micro-
organism. There results an enormous proliferation of cells, many
of which become devitalised, and form pus, whilst those at the
margin of the abscess of higher vitality prove too strong for the
micrococci, and the abscess remains localised. By what means
the micro-organism retains its vitality until it reaches the weak
point is at present merely a matter of conjecture. Is it simply
paralysed, or is it passed rapidly to a spot in which it can live or
flourish, or is it so protected by the material in which it had origi-
nally flourished, or by other micro-organisms which, themselves dying,
still serve as shields to those which arrive at their destination? This,
and numerous other most interesting questions, still await solution.

ACTION ON TISSUES—TUBERCLE. 9

7. Returning to the tubercle bacillus, as an example of an organism
acting first chemically on the tissues by its products, and then
upon the cells weakened by this reaction, it may be observed that
a single tubercle bacillus coming in contact with a healthy mucous
surface is unable to retain its footing for a long enough time to allow
of the performance of any pathogenic function. In the lung, such a
solitary bacillus, even if allowed to remain, could find no food from
which to elaborate its own peculiar products, and until this could be
done, there would be no changes in the cells with which it is in con-
tact. If, however, a mass of caseous material from some tubercular
focus be introduced into an air vesicle or a small bronchus, the con-
ditions are altogether changed. Such a mass, containing the bacillus,
its food, and its products, is brought directly into contact with the
epithelial surface, and unless the epithelium is endowed with the
greatest vitality, it cannot withstand the attacks first of the products
of the bacillus, and, second, of the bacillus itself.

That this is not merely hypothetical, is evidenced by the fact that
in a case of acute tuberculosis of the lung the following distribution
of the bacillus may be observed.

Taking the centre of a lobule, usually the bronchus, as the point
from which to commence the observation, it will be noted that in
this bronchus, and in the air vesicles immediately surrounding it,
caseation has become a well-marked process. In the caseous mass
bacilli are found (in the specimens under consideration) in enormous
numbers. Passing from the caseous centre, it will be found that
where traces of the original structure exist, the bacilli are still
present, but are not so numerous as in the centre. Extending the
observation to the margin of the tubercular mass, it will be noticed
that there is an area of active cell proliferation, not confined to the
endothelium of the lymphatics, but appearing also in the epithelium
of the air vesicles. In this mass of proliferating tissue there are
absolutely no bacilli at first; a few may be distinguished, here and
there, near the proliferating area, but where the proliferation is most
marked the bacilli are absent. In a very large number of sections
examined this was invariably the case. This can be best accounted
for on the theory that the bacilli during their growth and develop-
ment secrete or excrete a chemical substance which alters the

bike) PATHOLOGICAL MYCOLOGY.

activity or vitality of the cell from its original resistant and stable
condition to one in which there is an increased vegetative activity,
but a diminished resistant power to the action of the bacillus itself.
The highly organised proteid of the cell is thus rendered available as
food for these minute organisms, which advance in the track of their
chemical vanguard, and continue the process of disorganisation and
disintegration.

In this process may be recognised a most beautiful example of the
reaction of the bacillus and its products on the tissues, and, in turn,
of the tissues on the bacillus.

TissuE REACTION.

8. From recent researches on the mode of reproduction in certain
saprophytic and other fungi,’ it appears that it is possible for a
parasitic fungus to derive a sufficient amount of vitality from its host
to enable it to reproduce its like without the aid of a sexual process,
the necessary stimulus being supplied by the highly organised proteids
which are derived from the host, the original imprint of sexual
power being again brought into action without further fertilisation.
Applying this theory to the tissue cells in which the chemical pro-
ducts appear to set up proliferation, does it not seem more than pro-
bable that these cells act the part of female cells, on which a power
of reproduction was imprinted at the first impregnation of the ovum,
but which is only called into play on the application of a stimulus,
probably only chemical (see work of the two Darwins on action of
chemical substances on sensitive and insectivorous plants),—a
stimulus which thus takes the part of the male element in the repro-
ductive process. *

1 **On the Sexuality of the Fungi: ” H. Marshall Ward, Quart. Journ. Micros.
Scei., April 1884.

* Professor Frankland has recently defined a plant as being ‘‘an organism
performing synthetical functions, or one in which these functions are greatly
predominant ; an animal as an organism pefrorming analytical functions, or one in
which these functions greatly predominate.” He classes micro-organisms among
animals, as ‘‘ their life essentially depends upon the taking asunder of more or
less complex compounds, resolving them into simpler compounds at the expense of
potential energy.”

It would be almost impossible to classify some of the higher fungi as animals, but

TISSUE REACTION. I!

9. As is now well known, cell proliferation may be set up by
very numerous and very various forms of irritants, but the results,
though varying greatly in degree, are absolutely one in kind. Apply
any irritant to a surface or a tissue, and the result is a proliferation of
the cells. This appears to be the case especially in the connective
tissue group, where the increase in the number of cells is extremely
marked. Further, with this increased cell formation there is appa-
rently a taking up of the irritant material by the cells, and if one
cell is not sufficient for the task, a number combine to form plas-
modia (practically giant cells). That the taking up of these particles
or products further lowers the vitality of the cell, is evidenced by
the fact that as soon as the cell becomes filled with particles, it
dies, and with its contained material acts as an irritant to other cells.
The chemical products, then, may be looked upon as the prime
movers in bringing about a proliferation of the cells with which they
come in contact, by which proliferation the cells appear to attempt to
get rid of the irritant material, and their resisting power is thus
greatly weakened. At this point the direct action of the bacillus
on the cell comes into play. The bacillus attacks the weakened
cell, and applies to its own use the rich store of proteids contained
within the highly organised but comparatively non-resistant cell.
By the aid of this store of proteids it acquires sufficient energy to
reproduce its like by asexual spores, the tissue cells are gradually
reduced to the peculiar caseous nodules so characteristic of tubercle
masses, the degree of caseation in many cases corresponding appa-
rently to the number of the bacilli. The physiological products are
sent into the surrounding tissues, and the process is repeated. From
this caseous centre the bacilli with their products may be carried to
mucous surfaces, and thence to the lymphatics, and even veins; or
they may make their way directly to the lymphatics, where in some

some of them certainly exert analytical functions before their synthetical functions
come into play. And it can scarcely be held for a moment that the Darwins have
proved that insectivorous plants are animal because they flourish so much more
luxuriantly when they have presented to them complex proteid substances on
which thev also certainly exercise their analytical functions before their synthetical
functions are called forth.

1 Metschnikoff, ‘‘ History of Inflammatory Process:” Quart. Journ. Micros.
Sci,, January 1884.

12 PATHOLOGICAL MYCOLOGY.

cases, as in the small portal spaces around the veins of the liver, they
may be found in very considerable numbers, with apparently very
little caseation. This caseation, however, advances rapidly.

DIGESTIVE FERMENTS.

10. Duclaux, as a result of his brilliant experiments, arrived at the
conclusion that bacteria act upon complex nitrogenous bodies much
as do some higher organisms (animals) by a process of true digestion,
and that in the process of caseation the organic ferment secretes a
material which has much the same action upon milk as the diastase
secreted by the pancreas.

Further, Pasteur supposes that no digestion can take place without
the presence of micro-organisms, by whose aid alone albuminoid sub-
stances are gradually transformed through a series of analytical pro-
cesses into comparatively simple and readily absorbed material, either
in the presence of oxygen, or in some cases where there is no free
oxygen present. Only when these soluble substances are formed can
there be any food material which the micro-organism can apply to its
own use in carrying on its nutrition and development. Digestion
may therefore be looked upon as a process of fermentation, in which
the micro-organisms do not utilise the whole of the material on which
they act, but set free a very large proportion, which may be utilised
by the organisation in which the process is carried on. The organ-
isms are various, and the products, though in the main similar, con-
tain, as a rule, a minute quantity of a specific substance, and it is this
specific substance which, in the pathogenic species, appears not only
to digest dead material, but also to prepare living or only slightly de-
vitalised tissues for digestion.

In old tubercle masses the result of this process appears in the
form of caseous aébris, from which all tubercle bacilli may have dis-
appeared, as they have selected what they required, and have ex-
hausted the materials which were necessary for their maintenance ;
but whilst doing this they have, by setting free their diffusible fer-
ment, prepared the tissues in the immediate neighbourhood for the
reception of their progeny. In this way the process is continued and
extended. Continuing the analogy between the action of pathogenic

SPECIFIC DIFFERENCES OF ACTION. 13

Organisms and those concerned in the process of digestion and fer-
mentation, it may be pointed out that after one micro-organism has
completed its task another may step in and continue the process of
breaking down. How frequently a pyeemic condition supervenes on
a tubercular. How often has a patient suffering from tubercular
abscess of the kidney or of the lungs, succumbed at last (if not carried
off by acute tubercular disease) to pyeemia, and-pyzemia in which the
symptoms are extremely well defined, where a poison much more
active and far reaching in its character than the tubercular poison is
rapidly formed on the introduction of a fresh organism into dead,
but hitherto inactive or non-irritant, structures.

That these special products of bacterial fermentation do occur
can scarcely now be denied, nor that, where the ferment is found, the
organism secreting it must first have been present, not necessarily in
the position in which the ferment is found—for the ferment may be
much more diffusible, and may pass from point to point much more
readily than the organism to which it owes its origin, but at some
point whence absorption of the ferment could -take place.

SpeciFic DIFFERENCES OF ACTION.

11. The activity of the ferment undoubtedly varies greatly in different
cases, and the results of the action of these ferments on the tissue
must vary, perhaps. not so widely as the ferments themselves, but so far
that they may be roughly classified. On the one hand, there are the
effects produced in the so-called ‘“ granulomata,” where an irritant
action is set up, followed at first by a proliferation of the connec-
tive tissue or other cells, and then by a breaking down and case-
ation of the proliferated mass, the appearances varying according to
the tissue affected and the position of the growth in this tissue. These
changes take place slowly. Going to the other extreme, cases of
acute septicemia are sometimes met with, in which the patient is
cartied off in the course of a few days, and where the post mortem
changes are of the slightest and most general character. In such
extreme conditions there are, on the one side, the slowly growing and
slowly multiplying bacilli, which give rise to an irritant product, but
one the action of which is fairly definitely localised, and is carried on

14 PATHOLOGICAL MYCOLOGY.

for a considerable period, giving rise to marked histological changes
before the whole organism is appreciably affected ; whilst, on the other
side, the ferment is formed rapidly by organisms which grow rapidly,
and once formed, this ferment has an extremely toxic action—an
action which makes itself manifest at a very early period throughout
the whole of the organism attacked.

Between the two extremes are such conditions as pyzemia, where
there are not only local manifestations in the tissues after death, but
also the acute toxic symptoms during life, in which case, too, the disease
runs an intermediate course as regards its rapidity. As pointed out
by Koch, these effects depend upon two elements—/rs¢, the rapidity
of growth of the micro-organism which is attacking ; second, the rate
of secretion, and the quantity of the toxic element required to have
(2) a local and (4) a general effect. The rate of growth of the different
micro-organisms may be readily observed in artificial cultivation
media, where, under favourable conditions, it will be found to corre-
spond very closely with the rapidity of occurrence of the local mani-
festations in the animal tissues. Anthrax kills very rapidly, and the
bacilli grow very rapidly in artificial media at the temperature of the
body ; whilst tubercle affects locally and gradually, and its organism
grows extremely slowly, and only under specially favourable con-
ditions. In twenty-four hours there is a large crop of anthrax
organisms, whilst there is usually no evidence of the growth of such
a brood of tubercle bacilli until about a fortnight has elapsed.

12. These facts have a most important bearing upon the nature of
the processes which are met with in the various forms of disease in-
duced by micro-organisms ; and it would be almost possible to draw
two lines running parallel to one another, one of which might represent
the tubercle bacillus, the other the organism met with in septicemia,
the one acting slowly and locally, the other more rapidly and generally.

Neither organism can develop either its kind or its products if
deposited alone on a healthy surface. If, however, sufficient pabulum
is carried along with either of these organisms to supply it with nutri-
ment, then the products may be developed in sufficient quantities to
devitalise neighbouring tissues, or to neutralise that activity of the
cells which prevents their breaking down on the attack of the micro-

‘

SPECIFIC DIFFERENCES OF ACTION. 15

organism and its ferment. Both organisms attack a weakened sur-
face or tissue, first locally, the tubercle bacillus acting on the
weakened epithelial surface; the septic organism attacking tissues
which by bruising or laceration have lost their resisting power.
Having once found a coign of vantage, these organisms—though, as
seen above, with very different degrees of rapidity—multiply, elaborate
ferments, and put to their own use the materials that they obtain from
the tissues upon which they are growing. From this point the
ferment or product may be absorbed by the lymphatics, and then
passed on to the small veins. Here, apparently, the resemblance
ceases, though only apparently, for it will be found that in cases of
acute tuberculosis, as pointed out by Weigert, there is undoubtedly
an invasion of the system by the veins; whilst in certain cases of
more chronic septic poisoning the course is readily followed from the
original source through the lymphatics, and so to the veins, where
the micro-organisms are lost sight of, but are again detected in the
secondary inflammatory foci. The difference between the two mani-
festations could be accounted for by the different rapidity of growth of
each of the micro-organisms and ‘its ferment; by the relative diffusi-
bility and activity of the toxic ferment produced ; and by the resis-
tance of the tissues to the action of this ferment, either locally or
generally. Although such a parallel may be drawn between acute
septic poisoning and the tubercular process, there are, nevertheless,
certain facts which do not conform to the rule thus laid down.
There may be acute septic intoxication without the presence of
a single micro-organism in the tissues. Here there is sufficient
of the toxic material, developed on a large exposed surface, from
which it is absorbed, to give rise to the death of the patient.
The alkaloids formed during the decomposition of animal matter, if
carefully separated and injected into a vein, or even into the con-
nective tissue, have a similar effect ; and even one of the products of
the best known form of fermentation—a fermentation which takes
place under well defined conditions, and outside the body—alcohol,
has a distinct toxic effect on the nerve centres, if taken in sufficient
quantities. This toxic effect, though similar in many respects to that
induced during the course of the specific infective diseases, must be
carefully distinguished from it. In the true specific diseases organisms

16 PATHOLOGICAL MYCOLOGY.

are constantly found in relation to the tissues of their hosts, which
are in each case typical, and in which they find conditions adapted
to their requirements, and favourable to the development of their
products. :

SELECTIVE AFFINITIES.

18. The inquirer into the relations between micro-organisms and
disease is met at the very outset by a more difficult question. What
peculiarity in the micro-organism itself, or in its host, determines its
development or non-development in the tissues of the infected animal ?
And how is it that micro-organisms appear to exercise a certain
selective power, growing readily in one animal, but remaining inactive
in another ?

Why should the anthrax bacillus attack man and not the pig, an
ox or a mouse, but not a dog? Why also should the tubercle
bacillus have a special affinity for certain animals, and not for others.
How do the house-mouse and field-mouse differ, that in one, “mouse
septicemia” is readily induced, whilst in the other, this is seldom or
never the case?

Klein found, as a result of his experiments on swine plague, that
he could produce this disease by inoculation in rabbits and mice,
but that it isimpossible to obtain similar results in man or birds, in
the guinea-pig or carnivorous animals.

He further found that infusions of the flesh of any of these groups
of animals served equally well as a nutrient material for artificial
cultivation of either anthrax bacillus or the bacillus of swine plague.
There can therefore be nothing in the dead flesh itself, which, by
chemical or other reactions, aids or hinders the growth of the specific
micro-organisms. As to the exact nature of the aiding or retarding
factors in the living tissues, there are as yet no exact experiments.
Anything as yet advanced is mere theory. Klein throws aside the
general vital theory, and advances the statement that “the most
feasible theory seems to me to be ‘this, that this inhibitory power
is due to the presence of a chemical substance produced by the
living tissue.” He therefore specialises the vital theory, but retains
it as a means of explaining the chemical. This is as yet incapable of
exact proof, but there is a certain amount of evidence in its favour.

SELECTIVE AFFINITIES. 17

The chemical material, it may be assumed, could act in two ways.
It might act as a substance without which the microbe could not
live, or it might act either as a poison to the microbe, or as an
antidote to or a remover of a poison formed by the organism itself
under its new condition. In some animals, then, it will altogether
inhibit the pathogenetic activity of the organism.; in others, where it
is not so constituted as to counteract the morbific products, or the
activity which gives rise to them, the organism will continue to pro-
duce them, and either the cell elements of the host or those of the
attacking organism will succumb to their action.

In artificial media it is a frequent experience to find organisms
destroyed by the virulence of their own products, before all the food
material adapted to their existence has been exhausted; and the
clinical evidence of those infective diseases in which a c7visés occurs
(eg., Croupous pneumonia) goes far to support the view that a similar
process takes place at times within the body.

14. M. Raulin, in his experiments upon Asferg//us nigrescens, found
that although it could grow readily on bread moistened with vinegar,
it flourished much more luxuriantly on an artificially prepared medium,
in which certain definite inorganic materials are present.—(See
Raulin’s liquid, § 58, p. 110). He found that under ordinary con-
ditions 25 grammes of dried aspergillus is regularly obtained from a
definite quantity of the liquid before the whole of the elements are
exhausted. If the small proportion of potassium be removed, only
one gramme of the dried aspergillus is produced, whilst if the zinc be
omitted from the liquid (only sy 2p part of the mixture), the crop
gathered amounts to 2°5 grammes only. This zinc is found in small
quantities in the aspergillus, and is therefore taken up as one of its
alimehts. Most minute quantities of nitrate of silver (y¢o¢,500), of
corrosive sublimate (yg), of bichloride of platinum (5 gy), &c., act
as poisons upon this same aspergillus, and: prevent its growth.
Duclaux, in commenting upon these facts, points out that ‘as the
plant does not contain any green matter, it may be surprising to see
that iron is one of its nutritive elements. Indeed, the withdrawal of
that metal produces results similar in importance to those produced
by the suppression of zinc. The addition of one gramme of iron to

B

18 PATHOLOGICAL MYCOLOGY.

the nutritive medium will increase the crop by 800 grammes.
Notwithstanding this resemblance, the functions of zinc and iron are
quite different. Zinc enters the plant as a constituent of its tissues.
The only use of iron appears to be to destroy, or suppress pending
production, a poison which the plant secretes, and which, were it to
accumulate, would ,end by killing the plant. It is one of those
secretions which are common to all living organisms, and which they
should get rid of at any cost. This is the service iron renders to the
aspergillus. Zinc is a physiological aliment; iron is a physiological
antidote.”

15. Though it be so closely allied morphologically to aspergillus,
the Penicillium glaucum is found to differ from it in its relations to
some of these chemical substances. It is true that it will also flourish
in Raulin’s fluid, but its growth is rendered more luxuriant by the
addition of a little sulphate of lime; and its relations to antiseptic
,substances differ much from those of the aspergillus, for it can grow
in solutions of nitrate of silver and perchloride of mercury, the least
trace of which would be instantly fatal to the former. From the
close similarity of the functions of the cells of the body and of those
of the invading organism, it might have been anticipated that what is
food for the one would be food for the other. But, following the
analogy just cited, we may infer that this is not the case. One class
of nutrient substances will promote the growth of the normal cells,
and consequently health ; another the growth of parasitic cells, and
consequently disease. Similarly one form of medication may destroy
the disease, and another the patient.

MUTABILITY OF SPECIES.

16. Some first principles are to be grasped before proceeding to the
practical points which have to be considered. We have to deal with
a confessedly large number of species separated from one another, as
it would at first sight appear, by wide differences, both of form and
of function, by paying attention to which these species might be
arranged and classified. A question has arisen as to how far such an
apparently natural classification may be looked on as reliable and

MODIFICATION OF FUNCTION. # 19

permanent, and it has been held by some that one species of micro-
organism may, under appropriate conditions, change its nature com-
pletely, and appear in the guise of another species separated from its
original form by a wide gap, and this whether the evolution be
viewed morphologically or functionally. Such was the doctrine pro-
mulgated by v. Naegeli, and still maintained by some of his disciples.
But the results of more recent research on this point have rendered
such a position apparently untenable, and it has been now pretty
generally abandoned as the direct outcome of imperfect methods of
research employed in the elucidation of a very difficult, and till recent
years a very obscure subject.

MobDIFICATION OF FUNCTION.

17. It is, however, by no means inconceivable that in favourable
circumstances a micro-organism may change its functional, and even,
within certain closely circumscribed limits, its morphological charac-
teristics, in consonance with what is known of the modifications
produced by domestication or similarly varied conditions amongst
the higher animals; but as in the latter, so also in the former, the
thoroughly accredited law of reversion to type comes into play so
soon as the abnormal circumstances which occasioned the devia-
tion are removed, and the species once more assumes its typical
characteristics.

For this reason, the statements of Buchner and some others have
been viewed with grave doubt. They claim to have effected through
a long series of gradations a complete change from one well defined
species into another, equally well defined, with functions quite dis-
tinct from, but morphologically closely allied to, the initial species.
They effected this transformation by delicately graduated modifications
in the surroundings of the initial species, and, when completed, they
regard the change as permanent. At this point, however, it must be
distinctly recollected that the long chain of altered conditions thus
employed has been in every link exposed to extreme dangers, which
even consummate skill as regards ¢echnigue cannot render nugatory ;
for in every one of the hundreds of re-inoculations carried out in pro-
ducing the vast number of so-called “ generations,” between the

20 PATHOLOGICAL MYCOLOGY.

commencement of the process and its final issue, there was consider-
able risk of extraneous contamination. It is nevertheless unjustifiable
to urge the extreme difficulty of the quest as the probable cause of a
fallacious result ; and the position which one must therefore almost '
of necessity occupy at present is one of expectancy, until more
conclusive investigations have been completed, and the whole
question put in such a position that its settlement may become a
possibility. The evidence on this point so far produced tends
strongly against the transmutation theory; but as yet no sufficient
mass has been brought forward on either side to render a final
decision possible.

REQUIREMENTS OF MICRO-ORGANISMS.

18. At this stage it will be well, shortly and in general terms, to state
what are the main vital necessities of a micro-organism which deter-
mine the relation it will take up to the various tissues or media in
which it may occur. Lying as it does on the borderland between the
animal and the vegetable worlds, its nature is of a but slightly differ-
entiated type, and its requirements are proportionately simple. An
analysis of its chemical constitution shows it to be composed of 88
per cent. of water, 2 per cent. of inorganic ash, and to per cent. of
organic compounds. This composition gives a general indication
as to what substances it will chiefly require to sustain its life and
development ; and it is found accordingly that its food must consist
very largely of watery elements. The organic compounds requisite
to its life are chiefly those rich in carbon and nitrogen; and the
minerals which it specially needs are potassium and compounds of
phosphorus.

Micro-organisms differ to a very great extent as to their dependence
upon, or independence of, the presence of free oxygen. So marked is
the former condition in certain genera—as, for instance, the moulds—
that they do not grow actively except on free surfaces, where, they
can obtain oxygen directly from the atmosphere, or under such con-
ditions as permit of their readily obtaining it. Other genera, and
notably those of the yeast series, are capable of passing through all
the stages of their life-history without obtaining oxygen, except the

GERMS. 21

scanty supply derived by their power of breaking up complex
chemical compounds.

These features will require more exact delineation in the section
upon the vital functions of micro-organisms.

GERMS.

19. The features of micro-organisms thus far described have applied
only to their adult state. Up to the present, but little is known of
their germ stage, beyond the fact that their spores are present in
water and in soil in innumerable numbers, and are almost constantly
floating in the atmosphere as fine impalpable organic dust. Atmo-
spheric germs may even come to have a distinct qualitative value
of their own,—not, it is true, from any qualities which they at
present possess, beyond what may be summed up in the term
“vitality,” but in potential properties, which may at any time become
active. These possibilities may be roughly gauged by the careful
observation of the atmosphere in which they float, as, for instance,
noting its hygroscopic conditions—a dry atmosphere being, as a rule,
less germ-laden than a saturated one—and such gross meteorological
observations as the direction and force of the wind, and the condition
of the earth’s surface, whether dusty or otherwise. High winds and
, dust tend to load the atmosphere with germs; absence of wind and
rain have the opposite effect, allowing of mechanical subsidence of
the floating germs, and providing for their distribution in the soil by
the percolating streams of rain, which they perforce accompany.
But wherever they may be, they retain their capabilities of growth
and development through almost all circumstances short of absolute
dessication by heat, or the action of some other powerful germicide,
and are prepared to develop into their adult form whenever they are
supplied with the necessary conditions of warmth, moisture, and a
nutrient soil. The fact that these three factors are so typically present
in the case of a surgical wound, accompanied by the lowered vitality
of the tissues—also a point of great importance—has led to the
development of a special department in surgical practice; and a
recognition of the fact that the human body lends such admirable
aid to their growth and development is the key to understanding the

22 PATHOLOGICAL MYCOLOGY.

significance of medical infective diseases, and the one basis on which
a therapeutic system can be constructed. The best researches on the
subject lead us to believe that normal healthy tissues are perfectly
free from the presence of micro-organisms, and their presence thus
directly indicates a diminution in the vitality of the tissue elements
near which they lie. Fully vitalised tissues react so powerfully on the
micro-organisms, or their germs, as to prevent any development on
their part; but this condition once lost, the tissues are no longer
resistant, but supply all the requirements of the parasite in the points
most closely essential to its life and growth, and become, for the time
being, a delicately adapted incubator, in which the life of the organism
passes rapidly through its phases.

t

CONDITIONS NECESSARY TO INVESTIGATION.

20. In the investigation of any disease where one is led to suspect the
interference of a micro-organism, there are certain points of essential
importance which must be clearly proved before any such proposition
can be established as that a micro-organism is directly concerned in
its causation.

(a.) Firstly, we must have a well defined typeof disease, accompanied
in all cases by symptoms so characteristic as to constitute a specific
malady. In all such cases, at one stage or other of their course, it
must be possible to demonstrate a micro-organism of constant form,
and disposed in a constant relation to the blood or solid tissues of
its host; and this organism must only be found in the tissues of
animals which are suffering, or have suffered, from the distinctive
symptoms already observed.

(4.) Secondly, by carefully effecting the isolation of these organisms
from the tissues, and inoculating them in nutrient media specially
adapted for their support, it must be possible to cultivate them arti-
ficially apart from the tissues of their host. These cultivations must
be absolutely shielded from contamination by the various extraneous
conditions with which they may come into relation, and must re-
tain the same typical appearances throughout a long series of culti-
vations carried on under constant conditions ; showing that they have
received no new elements from without, nor has any change occurred

CONDITIONS NECESSARY TO INVESTIGATION. 23

within the culture, owing to there having been a commingling of
species ; for if the latter has been the case, one of the members in
this community usually flourishes at the expense of its neighbour, and
an alteration in the general type of growth is at once apparent in the
artificial cultivation.

By a course of constant re-inoculation through a series of carefully
prepared media, any tendency to such an alteration becomes much
more prominent ; and when a line of demarcation at length becomes
clearly visible between two mingled species, the same system allows
of their ready separation, and the cultivation of each apart as a single
species, such cultures being then termed “ pure cultivations.”

In certain favourable media, it is possible, by merely noting the
salient features, such as the form and general appearance of the
growth, to state with certainty not only the fact that it is a pure culti-
vation, or otherwise, of a micro-organism, but also to place it at once
in one or other of the classes into which the lower fungi are divided,
and to describe broadly the physiological and pathogenic functions
with which such an organism is likely to be endowed.

As Koch points out, these macroscopic appearances and modes of
growth must, in the present state of our knowledge of the morpho-
logical and physiological distinctions, be looked upon as of even
greater value than microscopic and chemical characteristics. Hence
the enormous importance attached to the study of these macroscopic
appearances, especially in the case of micrococci, whose microscopi-
cal differentiation is in many instances absolutely impossible.

(¢.) In the third place, it must be possible, by the inoculation of the
organism thus isolated into the system of an animal liable to the
disease, to reproduce it, and the disease so reproduced must have
all the symptoms of the original complaint,-or at least a sufficient
number of them to give it the specific character.

(d.) And, fourthly, in the tissues of the animal thus attacked, there
must be a recognition of the same foreign elements in the same
relation to the tissues of their host as was observed in the original
case.

*LHAPrIER 1h

METHODS OF EXAMINATION.
CHEMICAL REAGENTS.

21. The detection of micro-organisms in fluids and tissues was for
long a matter of extreme difficulty, and it has only been during late
years that, as the methods of lighting and staining objects were
improved, anything like uniform or satisfactory results could be
attained.

Without oil immersion objectives with improved condensing and
illuminating apparatus, and without aniline colours, the vast field of
research now open to mycologists must have remained a ¢erra incog-
nita. One can only wonder that so much had been done, when the
old methods are compared, or one should rather say contrasted, with
those at our command. In this chapter it must be our aim to detail
as fully and exactly as possible the various processes by which
micro-organisms may be prepared for examination in fluids, and in
moderately thick sections of tissues.

Before commencing the description of the methods, it may be well
to consider what are the conditions under which these micro-organisms
are found, and the different media in which they have to be examined.
First, they may be present in some fluid or secretion from the body,
as in pus from an abscess, blood, sputum, fluid scraped from a fresh
surface of an organ, the fluid drawn from a vesicle or pustule, the
secretions or scrapings from the mouth, discharge from the urinary
passages, rectum, &c.; in most of which fluids there is a certain
per-centage of albuminoid material, a factor which must be borne in
mind in connection with the mode of preparation of these fluids
for examination. Secondly, it may be necessary to examine certain
specially prepared fluids, in which micro-organisms are known to
flourish and multiply—fluid cultivating media. Thirdly, they may

CHEMICAL REAGENTS. 25

have to be examined as they grow on or in some of the solid
cultivating media—gelatine, blood serum, bread paste, potatoes, &c. ;
fourthly, as they occur in the tissues of the body; and lastly, in
various organic materials—foods, dust, mould, vegetables, and so on.
In whatever position they are found, these micro-organisms . react
as though they were perfectly free, and the differences of treatment
are necessitated, not from any change in the organism itself, but
from the different surroundings it has assumed. ‘Thus, it would not
be necessary to add any reagent to a cultivation of micro-organisms
in a clear meat extract; all the micro-organisms are perfectly dis-
tinguishable, and in such a fluid there is nothing else for which they
can be mistaken. Alcohol, chloroform, ether, or even strong alkalies
or acids, have not the slightest effect on them ; there is no alteration
in appearance, and the micro-organisms appear as sharply defined,
strongly refractile, rounded, ovoid, or rod-shaped bodies, the former
arranged in pairs, chains, or masses, the latter most frequently in
pairs or chains. On the addition of some of the aniline colouring
reagents the micro-organisms in the above fluid stain just as if they
were embedded in the tissues or in a mass of sputum.

It is only when they are mixed up with other granular inorganic or
organic matter, or when they are embedded in tissue cells, or in inter-
cellular or other spaces in the body, that there is any great difficulty in
identifying these micro-organisms, and in assigning to them their
proper position in the scale of nature.

These organisms, with a single exception (the Spirochete Ober-
meyeri), exhibit an extraordinary resistance (optically) to all chemical
reagents, for, as noted, they are not changed in the slightest degree
by the above-mentioned reagents ; and it is to this fact that we owe
the possibility of distinguishing them from the tissues or granular
material in which they lie, all of which may be more or less altered
by one or other of these chemical reagents. ‘The addition of acids
will, in most cases, dispose of inorganic granular matter, granular
looking fibrin, and even of tissue structure. Ether or chloroform,
and alcohol, dissolve out fatty granules or fat crystals. Caustic
potash or soda may be used instead of or along with the acid to
remove granular material, and to clear up the tissues. The following
may be taken as an example of the routine which should be observed

26 METHODS OF EXAMINATION.

in all cases where the presence of micro-organisms is suspected,
whether in fluids or in fresh or alcohol hardened specimens. In the
case of fluids, where there is a quantity of albumen present, Baum-
garten’s method is undoubtedly one of the most effective, and may be
applied to any of the fluids, though it is described in connection with
the detection and recognition of tubercle bacilli, to which further
reference will have to be made.

BAUMGARTEN’s METHOD.

22. Place a small portion of the fluid to be examined on a cover-
glass, which has been thoroughly cleaned with nitric acid, and then with
distilled water. With another cover-glass press the fluid out into as
thin a layer as possible, and wipe the margins with a scrap of blotting-
paper. ‘Separate the cover-glasses by sliding them from one another,
when each will be found to be covered on one side with a thin film
of sputum.” + Allow the films so formed to dry, and then, holding
one of the covers with a pair of forceps, pass it, ‘about as quickly as
one cuts a slice of bread,” three times through the flame of a spirit
lamp or a Bunsen’s burner in order to coagulate the albumen, which,
as already stated, is present in these fluids. Then immerse the cover
slips in a solution of a couple of drops of 33 per cent. solution of
caustic potash, added to a watch-glass full of distilled water. Press
the cover-glass down on a slide, and examine under a high power
(x 600), when the bacilli or micrococci may be observed as bright
refractile bodies, elongated or rounded, the elongated rods in some
cases showing strongly refractile bodies in their substance. It must
be remembered, in the case of micrococci, that minute granules of
coagulated albumen may be mistaken for these small round organisms,
whilst small crystals have been mistaken for bacteria, if this method
has not been fully and carefully carried out.

Fresh or spirit-hardened specimens should be treated as follows :—
After washing out the gum with warm carbolised distilled water, or
getting rid of any embedding material (celloidin, paraffin, &c.) which
may have been used, place the sections in absolute alcohol, where

1 See Lancet, 15th July 1882.

RECOGNITION OF MICRO-ORGANISMS. - 27

they should be allowed to remain for several minutes, then transfer
to ether or chloroform in a watch-glass, and ‘afterwards to a strong
solution of acetic, acid. Wash thoroughly in distilled water, after
which the sections may be warmed gently (until bubbles begin to
rise) in a two per cent. solution of caustic potash. By this treatment
all fat granules, which may be mistaken for micrococci, all small
crystals, which are sometimes mistaken for bacilli, granular fibrin,
and even differentiation of structure, are removed, and only the
resistant groups or strings of micrococci or bacilli are left for examina-
tion, Where micro-organisms are present in large masses in vessels
or connective-tissue spaces, this method is extremely useful; but for
single bacteria it is naturally far from satisfactory. If, however, the
single organism is in the form of a bacillus, it may be recognised by
its characteristic form, as the only thing for which it can be readily
mistaken, the fat crystal, has been removed by the above treatment.

RECOGNITION OF MiIcro-ORGANISMS.

28. In the case of micrococci, the chemical reactions are most impor-
tant, but there are also certain points to which attention must be paid
in regard to evidence of growth, community of form, and size and
regularity of arrangement, any or all of which may prove of great
service in helping to determine the nature of suspected granules.
Most experts agree that the forms of single micro-organisms render
but little help to the observer who has to determine their exact
nature. But these forms, when considered along with other fea-
tures, may prove of great value. Thus, when associated with a
sharp margin, a well defined outline, a high refractive index—giving
it a peculiar glistening appearance—the micro-organism is readily
enough recognised. The above refers especially to single cocci, but
other characteristics come to our assistance if these small bodies are
in groups. For instance, massed together, they have a peculiar brown
tinge, and, examining the individual cocci of which this mass is com-
posed, they are found to have all the above characteristics as to form,
outline, and appearance; but then another striking feature attracts
attention—all the cocci of the same group are of equal size and are of
the same form. If, instead of large groups, small numbers of these

28 METHODS OF EXAMINATION.

cocci come under consideration, it will be observed that there is
evidence of their multiplication in their mode of arrangement, and a
multiplication which at once removes them from the domain of
inorganic nature. They are arranged in pairs (see Fig. 1)—diplococci
—as though one had grown from the other by a process of cleavage or
partial fission. This process may have been continued so that, instead
of a single pair, there is a chain of some length made up of cocci of
the same shape and of equal size, the fission taking place in the same
plane at each successive division. In other cases the process of
fission may take place in planes alternately at right angles to one
another, in which event, as pointed out by numerous observers,

Fic. 1.—Pus from an acute abscess at time of evacuation. Dried
and treated with methyl violet. (x 700.)
a. Pus corpuscles between which may be seen the thin film of
coagulated albuminoid material.
6. Pair of micrococci—Diplococcus.
c. Chains of micrococci—Streptococci.
d. Sets of four—Tetrads.

peculiar tetrads are formed. Aicrococcus tetragonus or Sarcina ventri-
culi may be taken as examples of this mode of fission.

RECOGNITION OF MICRO-ORGANISMS. 29

In place of either of the above, there may be, as already pointed
out, large masses of micrococci, each of these masses embedded in a
glue-like matrix—gliacocci. In the case of bacteria there is similar
evidence of multiplication in the formation of pairs, where the two
elements are often arranged so as to contain a more or less obtuse
angle, or in the formation of regular chains-—streptobacteria. Most
of these points were early recognised, and were described by Hiller,
Naegeli, and others. If once it is recognised that the granules grow
as above, then they must be organic. There is additional proof
of this, as von Recklinghausen, Klebs, Waldeyer, and Friedlaender
pointed out, in the fact that in certain cases these micro-organisms
continue to multiply, even after death, in the blood-vessels, as is
evidenced by the fact that in cases of metastatic pyemia, ulcerative
endocarditis, and similar conditions, small varicose swellings occur
at intervals along the course of some of the capillaries and small
veins. These dilatations are filled with masses of small round
granules which fulfil all the above conditions, and which, by their
rapid growth zz siz, have caused the distention; for only organisms
which have this power of multiplication could have brought about such
a condition. The same holds good for the distended lymphatics of
croupous pneumonia, in which Friedlaender demonstrated the presence
of the multiplying micrococci peculiar apparently to that disease.

All bodies which do not conform to the above requirements may
be treated as either amorphous or granular precipitates, small particles
of inorganic material, or organic molecular granules. Inorganic
particles, angular or irregular in form, are also very irregular in their
size and mode of arrangement. ‘They are far less refractive than
either micrococci or granules of organic matter, whilst by their
chemical reaction they are at once recognised. As an example of
these inorganic particles may be taken the oxide of iron, which is
frequently found in sections stained for tubercle, and then treated
with nitric acid. Here the acid acts upon the steel of the needle
usually employed, and an oxide is formed, small particles of which
are deposited on the section. These are readily enough recognised
by one who has worked even a short time at micro-organisms, but
they will serve as an example of the case in point. (In all cases
where acids are used employ platinum needles.) Organic molecular

30° METHODS OF EXAMINATION.

granules are not so readily differentiated, but they also may, by
careful examination and treatment, be distinguished from micrococci,
for which alone they may be mistaken. (Fat crystals may possibly be
mistaken for bacilli, from which, however, they may be distinguished
by the difference in the manner of arrangement. Bacilli seldom
form clusters, but they frequently form strings or chains, the elements
of which form angles at their points of junction with each other—see
Fig. 2.) The organic granules are more angular, and have a less re-
fractile power than micrococci, though they are more regular in form
and more refractive than inorganic particles. The colour is variable, .
whilst the size and grouping are always more or less irregular.

Fic. 2.—Anthrax bacillus in scraping taken from cut surface of
the spleen of a cow, in a case of splenic fever. Specimen dried, then
stained with Bismarck brown, and mounted in a solution of acetate
of potash. (x 700.)

a. Small corpuscles from spleen.

6. Bacilli. Some, simply short rods; others, made up of a couple
of rods which enclose an angle ; others again, arranged in long
threads. The bright spores are to be seen in some of these
chains (c), whilst fission is taking place in others (@).

Here, too, the chemical reactions are invaluable, and, by the aid of
ether, chloroform, liquor potassae, acetic acid, &c., fat globules, com-

STAINING REAGENTS. “31

pound granular corpuscles, caseine, slender filaments of fibrin (Cohn),
or fibrin becoming granular, may in turn be distinguished from the
more resistant micrococci. In tissues it isa good rule, if no other
chemicals or staining reagents are at hand, and where the presence of
masses of micrococci is suspected, to macerate the sections for an
hour in a ten per cent. solution of liquor potassz, and then stain
with a solution of iodine; by this method the bacteria are stained
brown, whilst fat granules, &c. remain uncoloured.

‘

STAINING REAGENTS.

24. It is at once evident that, by careful attention to details such
as the above, micro-organisms can be distinguished with tolerable
certainty ; but it is only by calling to our aid staining methods that
we are able to study the minute structural peculiarities of these
organisms; in fact some of the most important peculiarities yet
recognised come out only as chemical colour reactions. Staining
methods, as applicable to the study of micro-organisms, are daily
becoming more perfect, and though in some cases they are being
elaborated, the general tendency is undoubtedly towards a simplifi-
cation of the processes. To Weigert and Koch we are especially
indebted for most of the elegant methods now at our command,
—methods which are based on the use of aniline colours.

It may be laid down as a general statement that micro-organisms
react to staining fluids very much as do the nuclei of cells. This
holds good so far, that most nucleus tinting materials will impart a
similar tint to micro-organisms; beyond this, however, it is found that
the micro-organisms hold the colouring matter more tenaciously than
do the cell-nuclei, and that the nuclei may be decolorised by the
use of certain reagents, such as carbonate of potash, recommended
by Koch, acetic acid, or one of the mineral acids, nitric or
hydrochloric.

In this connection it must be remembered that many micro-organ-
isms can at present only be classified according to their reactions
with the colouring and some one of the various decolorising reagents,
Some take on one stain more readily and retain it more persistently
than any other, and some, which in the first instance take up the

32 METHODS OF EXAMINATION.

same colour, yield it much more easily to one reagent than to another
In working with unknown bacteria, therefore, it is necessary to experi-
ment in turn with the various colours, and then the various alkaline
and acid decolorising reagents, and to note the reaction in each case.
A certain amount of discretion should also be used in the after treat-
ment of stained specimens, for although some of the aniline colours
are only slightly soluble in clove oil, others are extremely soluble,
though they are, in turn, unacted upon by turpentine, xylol, oil of
bergamot, or cedar oil. Even the solvent for the Canada balsam should
be a matter for careful consideration. Chloroform is perhaps the worst
of all. When aniline stained specimens are to be mounted, its place
should be taken by turpentine, benzole, and xylol, or the. balsam
should be simply warmed and used without any solvent. These
matters appear trifling in themselves, but upon a discriminating carry-
ing out of them depends the success of the operator in obtaining
permanent and reliable preparations.

Fliigge,* on the authority of Ehrlich, classifies the aniline colours
into two distinct groups, each of which has very distinct chemical and
physiological characteristics,—the acid and the basic dyes.

In the first group the colouring matter acts as an acid in combining
with bases to form salts, although it does not necessarily give an acid
reaction, nor is it necessarily in the form of a free acid. Amongst the
more important are eosin, picric acid, aniline black, alizarin, purpurin,
and perhaps hzematoxylin.

To the second group—the basic dyes—belong by far the greater
number of those which are used in staining bacteria. These are
fuchsin, rosaniline, methyl violet, methyl green, Magdala red, and
especially Bismarck brown, dahlia, and gentian violet. These basic
colours are sold as salts, and not as free bases, whilst fuchsin, for ex-
ample, may be sold as an acid salt, as chloride or acetate of rosaniline.

With these nucleus and germ tinting reagents we can colour both
nuclei and bacilli :— :

Red with nucleus tinting carmine solutions, with fuchsin, ma-
genta, &c.

1 «¢ Handbuch der Hygiene,” Pt. 1., Fermente und Microparasiten, C. Fligge,
Leipzig, 1883, p. 287. ;

STAINING REAGENTS. 33

Brown with Bismarck brown, vesuvin, and chrysoidin.

Green with methyl green.

Blue or violet with hematoxylin, methyl blue, methyl violet,
dahlia, gentian violet, &c.

The first experiments on staining germs were made with carmine
and hematoxylin, and Koch and others were successful in staining
not only the bodies of bacteria, but also, in certain cases, in demon-
strating the flagella. These reagents are now, however, superseded
by the aniline colours, principally the basic series (though these will
not stain flagella of bacteria as well as a concentrated aqueous extract
of logwood, the specimen being afterwards treated with a solution
of chromic acid).

‘Weigert’s gentian violet and picro-carmine method demonstrates

face we
e'€ ee 7
° 7

»* 8

ire,

ie

Fic. 3.-—Blood taken from a case of traumatic tetanus. Blood
corpuscles and micro-organisms stained with methyl violet, mounted
in Canada balsam. (x 700.)

most admirably the affinity of the basic aniline colours. The sections
are first placed in gentian violet (§ 27, p. 40), then washed in alcohol,
€

34 METHODS OF EXAMINATION.

transferred to water, and afterwards to Weigert’s solution of picro-
carmine for half an hour.

They are further washed first in water, then in alcohol, are clarified
with clove oil, and mounted in balsam. By this method the nuclei are
stained red and the bacilli violet; the carmine has replaced the
gentian violet in the nuclei, but has had no effect upon the violet
taken up by the bacilli. In a similar manner, a solution of iodine and
iodide of potassium does not remove the basic colours from micro-
organisms, but it rapidly decolorises nuclei and other tissues. It is
upon this fact that Gram’s method is founded.

For staining most bacilli and micrococci a saturated watery solution

oo

bag

Fic. 4.—Blood of a mouse killed by mouse-septicemia. Blood
dried, heated, and stained with mcthyl blue, and mounted in
glycerine. (x 700.)

a. White blood corpuscle with horse-shoe-shaped nucleus, and

numerous minute bacilli in and around it.

4. Red blood corpuscles,

¢, Small bacilli between corpuscles.

of gentian violet or methyl violet (ten minutes), methyl blue (thirty
minutes), or Bismarck brown (twenty-four hours) may be used. The

GRAMS METHOD OF STAINING. 35

time required for the section to become stained varies also with the
temperature, and the above periods may be considerably shortened if
the temperature be slightly raised. When sufficiently deeply stained,
the sections are washed in distilled water, then in weak acetic acid,
and again in distilled water. If the colour is to be allowed to remain
in the nuclei, the section should be mounted at once in Canada
balsam, dammar varnish, Farrant’s solution, glycerine jelly (prepared
by dissolving one part of gelatine in six parts of water, adding seven
parts of glycerine and one per cent. of carbolic acid; heating the
whole, and then filtering whilst warm), a saturated solution of acetate
of potash ; or for Bismarck brown preparations, glycerine.

Where alcohol and clove oil are used in the process of mounting,
great care should be taken that the sections are not allowed to remain
too long in either of these fluids, or by their continued solvent action
even the dyes in the bacteria may be partially or wholly removed,
if not at first, after the lapse of some time. If the nuclei are to
remain unstained, and the sections are to be cleared up as much
as possible, the section is stained, afterwards washed in distilled
water, and then transferred to a five per cent. solution of carbonate
of potash, by which the colouring matter is discharged from all the
tissues except the bacilli or micrococci. This method is invaluable
for the demonstration and enumeration of bacilli contained within
vessels or thick sections, as in intestinal mycosis, where the anthrax
bacilli are to be observed 2 sitw in the capillary vessels of the in-
testinal villi.

In place of a watery solution, a saturated alcoholic solution of
almost any of the germ-tinting aniline colours may. be made up in
large quantity, and diluted as required with about ten times its bulk
of distilled water or of aniline oil water.—(Weigert.)

Gram’s METHOD OF STAINING.

25. Perhaps one of the most satisfactory methods is that recom-
mended by Gram. All specimens to be stained by this method should
be preserved in absolute alcohol, and should be transferred at once to
Weigert’s or Ehrlich’s gentian violet, or fuchsin and aniline water solu-
tion (§ 27, p. 40), where they may remain for from one to three

36 METHODS OF EXAMINATION.

minutes (tubercle sections should be left for from twelve to twenty-four
hours), wash in alcohol for three minutes, and then in a solution
of ten parts iodine, twenty parts iodide of potassium, and 3000 parts
of water, until the dark blue violet is replaced by a dark purple red.
Wash in alcohol until most of the colour has disappeared, then clear
up in oil of cloves until still more of the colour is removed. The
sections may be mounted at once in balsam when the tissues and
nuclei have a faint yellow tinge, and the micro-organisms are deep
blue or almost black; or they may be stained with a deeper contrast
stain, such as an alcoholic solution of eosin or Bismarck brown, or a

Fic. 5.—Bactl/us anthracis. Stained by Gram’s method with
methyl violet and vesuvin. Mounted in Canada balsam. (x 700.)
Anthrax rods and filaments stained with the methyl violet. Some
spores are seen as bright points in the rods. Cells from pulp of
spleen of cow from which specimen was taken are stained brown
by the vesuvin.

watery solution of vesuvin. Cover-glasses, with their films of sputum,
&c., after being prepared (see § 22, p. 26) are treated in exactly the
same manner as sections.

STAINS FOR SPECIAL BACILLI. 37

STAINS FOR SPECIAL BACILLI.

26. Most of the known micro-organisms may be stained by the aboye
method, but there are some which require special treatment, and there
are probably others for which a method of staining has not yet been
discovered. For instance, the glanders bacillus is’ best stained by
an alkaline solution of methyl blue, which, according to Schiitz,
is prepared by making a one-tenth per thousand watery solution
of caustic potash, and adding one-third the bulk of a saturated
alcoholic solution of methyl blue. The sections are then treated

Fic. 6.—Bacilli in swollen mucous membrane of lower part of
small intestine. Case of typhoid fever, child. Stained by Gram’s
method, gentian violet and eosin. (x 300.)

a. Epithelium of crypts.

&. Small round cells like adenoid corpuscles, amongst which the

violet stained bacilli (c) are found in enormous numbers.
Here and there are a few larger endothelioid cells.

with dilute acetic acid, and mounted in some of the various mount-
ing media.
Typhoid bacilli are also stained by Schiitz’s methylene blue solu-

38 METHODS OF EXAMINATION.

tion, but not so well by Gram’s method, unless they have been
soaked for a few minutes in a strong (one per cent.) solution of
bichloride of mercury after they are stained with the gentian violet,
when extremely good results are obtained. Gram considers that
the bichloride of mercury acts as a mordant, or fixer of the colour,
in the bacilli.

The bacillus of leprosy also requires special treatment ; it is per-
haps most readily stained by Koch’s original tubercle stain, alkaline

Fic. 7.—Micrococci from sputum in a case of acute pneumonia
during the early stage. Stained with gentian violet and eosin.
(x 700.)

a. Pus corpuscles, stained by eosin.

c. Micrococci, with delicately stained capsule.

methyl blue, with a watery solution of vesuvin for the contrast stain.
Methyl blue and fuchsin are also recommended.!

1 Lancet, August 23, 1884. ‘‘ Zhe Demonstration of the Bacillus lepre.—
Dr. Manson gives a most admirable method of demonstrating, for diagnostic
purposes, the presence of the Bacz//us lepre in the infiltrated leprous patches.
“A leper tubercle or infiltrated patch is selected, and the whole or part of it
included in the jaws of an ordinary thin-bladed pile clamp. The tightening of

METHODS OF STAINING TUBERCLE BACILLI. 39

For certain organisms, micrococcus of pneumonia in sputum, micro-
coccus of gonorrheea, &c., Klein recommends a mixture of methyl blue
and vesuvin. Gram’s method appears, however, to be preferable for
the microccus of pneumonia, whether in sputum or in the tissues.

Friedlaender succeeded in staining the pneumonia micrococcus in
the tissues by the following method. Stain the sections in

Fuchsin, . ‘ ‘ : { part.
Distilled water, F : 4 100 parts.
Alcohol, . ‘ : : 5 parts.
Glacial acetic acid, . . ; 2 parts.

Afterwards rinse them first in alcohol and then in a two per cent.
solution of acetic acid, clear up in alcohol and oil of cloves, and
mount in balsam.

MEtTHopS oF STAINING TUBERCLE BACILLI.

27. The tubercle bacillus differs from most other bacteria in the fact
that it holds the aniline stains with great tenacity, even when acted
upon for a short time by a strong mineral acid, or for a longer time
by a dilute solution of one of these acids.

The most favourable results are obtained if the thin layer of sputum
or thin section of tissue be first treated with some alkali such as
potash lye, or, better still, aniline oil. In place of an alkali, carbolic
acid one to twenty has been used, and with some success, and even
a one per cent. solution of bichloride of mercury.

Koch's original method was as follows :—

The cover-glass with the dried and coagulated film (§ 22, p. 26) is

#

the clamp has the effect of driving out all the blood from the included tissues,
and the tubercle, from being dirty red, or purple, becomes like yellow wax.
The hold of the clamp is maintained at a degree of tightness sufficient to keep
up this state of anzemia, and at the same time the centre of the included mass
is pricked with a needle or sharp knife. From the puncture a droplet of perfectly
clear fluid exudes, and is to be transferred to one or more cover-glasses, each
cover-glass being smeared with rather a thick layer of the leper juice. The
cover-glasses are then dried, stained, washed, and mounted in the ordinary way.
The Weigert-Ehrlich method I have found gives good results. Under the
microscope, slides so prepared show bacilli in prodigious numbers, both free and
in dense bundles, packing the leper cells.’ Klein recommends that the film be
stained with magenta, washed in distilled water, and then stained with methyl blue.”

4° METHODS OF EXAMINA TION.

placed in the following solution for from twelve to twenty-four
hours :—

Methyl blue concentrated alcoholic solution, . I part.
Distilled water, ' , ‘ 3 200 parts.
Io per cent. caustic potash solution, . : 2 parts.

Stir this mixture well and frequently.

Then immerse the cover-glass for a couple of minutes in a watery
solution of vesuvin, until the blue coloration has disappeared, rinse
with distilled water, examine at once, or allow the film to dry
thoroughly, and then mount in Canada balsam. Sections may be
cleared up with clove oil or cedar oil, as recommended by Koch.

By this method the tubercle bacilli are stained blue, and the rest
of the tissues, pus corpuscles, &c. brown. Ehrlich sought to sim-
plify the process, or rather to render the detection of the bacilli more
certain, by using one of the mineral acids as a decoloriser, having
found by experiment that the acid had no effect upon the rods stained
with gentian violet or fuchsin, although other tissues were rendered
colourless. Koch very early adopted Ehrlich’s plan, which is as
follows, as given by Koch.?

Stain sections of tissues or films on ere for at least
twelve hours in the following solution :— _

Saturated alcoholic solution of methyl violet or fuchsin, 11 parts.

Aniline water, ‘ : ‘ ; . 100 parts.

Absolute alcohol, . ; 3 ‘ Io parts.

The staining of films on cover-glasses may be accelerated by
gently heating the staining solution until steam rises from the
surface. Such preparations are stained in from a quarter to half
an hour under these conditions. Pass the preparations rapidly
through a dilute (one to three) watery solution of nitric acid, care
being taken that this is perfectly free from nitrous acid, that sections
are never allowed to remain more than a few minutes—two or
three—and cover-glasses half a minute. Any colour that remains
after this is perfectly soluble in sixty per cent. alcohol, but it
is by no means so soluble in water, hence the preparations are

1 R. Koch, “ Die AXtiologie der Tuberkulose:” Aattheil. aus dem Kaiserl.
Gesundhettsamte, vol, ii. ‘

METHODS OF STAINING TUBERCLE BACILLI. 4!

at once transferred to alcohol of such a strength, and left there
for ten or fifteen minutes, after which they are stained for several
minutes with a weak solution of vesuvin or methyl blue. Rinse
with sixty per cent. alcohol, and then with absolute alcohol, as
for ordinary balsam specimens. In the further preparation of these
specimens, Koch objects strongly to the use of clove oil for clearing
up the preparations, and advises the use of turpentine or cedar oil,
neither of which removes the aniline colour from the specimen.
He also advises the use of turpentine as a solvent for the balsam.
In preparations treated in this manner, before the sccond staining

Fic. 8.—Section of liver. Acute tubercle. Stained with gentian
violet. No contrast stain. (x 400.)

a, Section of ‘a small vessel in the portal space.

6. Connective tissue of portal space.

c. Enormous masses of tubercle bacilli in the perivascular lym-

phatics, and also in the lymphatics or connective tissue spaces.

Some of the bacilli have been carried into the lumen of the vessel,
where they are in contact with the blood corpuscles. This is pro-
bably accidental.

there is not the slightest coloration of the tissues, or at most there
is a faint blue tinge, but the tubercle bacilli stand out very pro-

42 METHODS OF EXAMINATION.

minently as deeply stained rod-shaped bodies. It is, however, ex-
tremely difficult to observe the relations of these rod-shaped bodies
to the tissues in which they lie, especially when they are present in
small numbers, or where they occur as single rods scattered at great
intervals. In order to obviate this difficulty, a second or contrast
colour is used, a colour which will stain the nuclei and cells deeply,

and which will also serve as a background to bring into relief the
bacilli.

If the bacilli are stained with methyl blue or gentian violet,

Fic. 9.—Tubercle bacilli in sputa, Stained with gentian violet.
Contrast stain Bismarck brown. Weigert’s method. (x 450.)

Bismark brown or vesuvin forms the best contrast stain ; with magenta
or fuchsin methyl blue is preferable.

Since Weigert, Ehrlich, and Koch worked at these methods, there

have been innumerable modifications, most of which have for their
object the simplification and shortening of the process, and are
specially devised for the use of clinicians.

28. Rindfleisch’s method.—First prepare a solution as follows :—Satu-
rated alcoholic solution of fuchsin, ten drops; aniline water, freshly
prepared and filtered, two drachms. Pour this into a watch-glass, and
place the cover-glass prepared face downwards on the surface; with
a pair of forceps hold the watch-glass over a spirit lamp or other
flame until steam rises from the surface of the staining fluid.
Remove the cover-glass with a pair of forceps; wash off the super-

METHODS OF STAINING TUBERCLE BACILLI. 43

fluous stain with distilled water, and then transfer to a watch-glass
half filled with alcohol, to which has been added a couple of drops

SE eee =

Fic. to.—Pair of spring forceps with platinum points. These are
so constructed that a cover-glass is held between the points when
no pressure is exerted. The other end is simply a pair of ordinary
forceps.

of nitric acid; allow it to remain here for about a quarter of a
minute ; again wash in distilled water; dry, and mount in balsam.
Here of course only the bacilli are stained, but a contrast stain may
be used, if it is thought necessary.

29. Kaatzer’s method.—A capital method is that recommended by
Kaatzer, who, after staining the prepared film on the cover-glasses
with aniline water, 10 c.c., and saturated alcoholic gentian violet
solution fifteen drops, warmed to about 80° C. for a few minutes, and
removing the superfluous staining fluid with clean blotting-paper,
immerses them for about a half to one minute in a solution made up
as follows :—

Alcohol, ninety per cent. . ‘ : 150 parts.
Distilled water, . : ; : 30 parts.
Hydrochloric acid, ; I part.

Wash thoroughly in ninety per cent. stein (Gite to two minutes)
until the whole of the colouring matter disappears from the film ; ;
allow to dry, and then drop on the prepared surface a few drops of a
concentrated watery solution of vesuvin. At the end of a couple of
minutes again wash in distilled water, dry, and mount in balsam.
This method gives exceedingly good, and, according to the author,
very lasting results.

Heneage Gibbes’ modification may also be used, especially where

44 METHODS OF EXAMINATION.

a rapid double staining of sputum is desirable. He uses the following
mixture :—

Rosaniline hydrochloride, . ; : 2 parts.

Methyl blue, . ; j i i I part.
Triturate in a glass mortar.

Then dissolve aniline oil, : ; ' 3 parts.

Tn rectified spirit, ; ; . 15 parts.

And slowly add distilled water, ‘ . 15 parts.

Keep in a stoppered bottle ; allow the cover-glass with the hardened
film of sputum to remain in this solution (warmed) for four or five
minutes, and then wash in methylated spirit until no more colour
comes away; drain thoroughly, and dry. Sections may be stained
in the same fluid in three or four hours. Mount in Canada
balsam.

Each of the above methods has its own adherents, but the most
satisfactory results are obtained by Ehrlich’s method, as modified
by Koch and Kaatzer.

‘SouRCES OF ERROR IN OBSERVATION.

30. In examining stained specimens, the difficulties as regards the
identification of the various micro-organisms are to a very great
extent removed, but the beginner will, through imperfect staining
and inaccurate observation, undoubtedly be led into error, if it be
not borne in mind that, unless special methods of treatment be
adopted and carried out in all their details, the nuclei or parts of the
nuclei retain the germ-tinting reagents. Ina great number of cases
these nuclei appeared to be greatly broken up, and in such cases it is
an extremely easy matter to mistake the fragments of the nucleus for
a mass of micrococci in the centre of the cell.

Compound granular corpuscles, the small rounded masses of
fatty granules that are so frequently met with in tissues undergoing
fatty’ degeneration, are also not unfrequently mistaken for masses of
micrococci, even in fairly well stained specimens, and albuminoid
granules or other amorphous particles are similarly mistaken for
stained micrococci.

Such mistakes, however, cannot be often repeated, and after very

EXAMINATION OF “ FRESH” PREPARATIONS. 45

little practice and careful observation, such errors may be left out
of court entirely.

EXAMINATION OF “ FRESH” PREPARATIONS.

31. Although up to the present we have considered the examination
of dried and stained specimens only, it will be readily understood that,
after all, such examinations are far from perfect, and that the appear-
ances during life and the chemical peculiarities can only be deter-
mined by a careful examination of the micro-organisms in the fluids
or tissues in which they are growing. Such an examination should
be made in all cases where motion of the object in question could
afford us any clue as to its nature. In blood, for instance, in which
septic bacilli (Pasteur) are supposed to be present, the spontaneous
movements of the bacillus will afford a most direct proof of its
vitality. By these spontaneous movements currents are set up, and
shifting of the positions of the corpuscles are brought about, even
when the organisms themselves are distinguishable only by the
exercise of the greatest care.

Such movements are of even greater importance when we come to
the examination of bacteria cultivated in fluid media, for it is by
these that the organic nature of the growth in the fluid may be at
once determined. At the same time, as Naegeli points out, the move-
ment should be spontaneous to be of any very great diagnostic value,
and should be sharply differentiated from the oscillatory Brownian
movements, or from those movements brought about by currents
caused by evaporation, altered temperature, movements of the slide
or cover-giass, and other similar external causes.

By far the simplest method for such fresh examination is to take a
drop of the germ-laden fluid, blood, meat broth, sugar solution, &c. in
a fine glass pipette, place it ona clean slide, put on a cover-glass, and
examine at once. The fluid is perfectly transparent, and nothing but
the well defined micro-organisms are seen, either alone or between
the blood corpuscles, or in or around other cells. Should there be
any tendency to dry, a drop of distilled water, or, still better, a drop
of three-quarter per cent. solution ot common salt, that has been
thoroughly sterilised by boiling, may be added. -By dropping such

46 METHODS OF EXAMINATION.

fluids at the margin of the cover-glass, micro-organisms may be kept
unaltered’ and under observation for a considerable period. Small
fragments of tissue may be pressed out or teased out in the same
fluids, but never in the serum which exudes from the neighbourhood
of the incision, for the fluid itself may contain numerous micro-
organisms, which, becoming attached to, or lying on, or under the
fragments, may give rise to appearances which would otherwise not
be seen, and are therefore often very misleading.

Cultivations on solid media, peptonised meat jelly, agar-agar, Koch’s
blood serum, &c., should always in the first instance be treated in
the same way, by squeezing out between the cover-glass and slide,
and then by adding distilled water or the saline solution.

Where such specimens are to be kept for comparison or further
observation, a ten per cent. solution of acetate of potash forms a
capital mounting medium; or, in place of this, a mixture of gly-
cerine and water, or Farrant’s mounting fluid, may be used. .

In this fresh condition the various chemical reagents (§ 21, p. 25)

are used to great advantage, and the reactions are exceedingly well
defined ;

His’s METHOD OF STAINING AND WASHING.

32. In many cases it is necessary to stain micro-organisms, as they
exist in fluids which contain no albumen, and in which there is
nothing that by the application of heat, alcohol, or bichloride of
mercury can be rendered insoluble, and which, therefore, have to be
stained and washed in such a manner that they are not removed from
the slide or cover-glass during the process. His’s method of applying
the staining fluid at one edge of the cover-glass under which is the
material to be stained, and setting up a slight current by sucking up
fluid at the opposite margin with a piece of clean blotting-paper, is
the best for this purpose, The specimen is washed first with water,
and then with alcohol in the same manner, after which it may be
mounted in glycerine, run in at the margin; or the glasses are
separated, the films are allowed to dry, and then mounted in Canada
balsam. The best stains to use with this method are methy] blue and
Bismarck brown or vesuvin.

HARDENING OF TISSUES. 47

Fresh sections may be treated as already described (§ 31, p. 45),
but it is well to pass them through a saturated solution of bichloride

q

\

Fic, 11.—His’s method of washing off extra stain from dried films
in which there is no coagulable albumen. See description in text.

of mercury, by which the protoplasm of the tissues is fixed ; they then
may be transferred to a three-quarter per cent. saline solution, and
stained and mounted.

HARDENING OF TISSUES,

83. Although such examination in the fresh condition should always
be made where possible, the results obtained are never so satisfactory
as where the tissues in which the micro-organisms are embedded are
slowly and carefully “ fixed,” and where a more deliberate examination
may be made.

48 METHODS OF EXAMINATION.

Koch insists that all tissues in which the presence of micro-
organisms is suspected should be hardened in large quantities of
absolute alcohol. Such a method, however, is extremely expensive,
and, except for small pieces of tissue, which should be kept as test
pieces, is scarcely necessary, as methylated spirit, or even a mixture
of two parts Miiller’s fluid and one part of a two per cent. solution
of carbolic acid appears to answer equally well. In putting away
tissues to harden, the pieces should never be more than about half an
inch or three-quarters of an inch in diameter; and where absolute
alcohol is used they should be even smaller, otherwise the centre of
the cube is untouched by the reagent, which hardens very rapidly
indeed (within a week). The other fluids harden the pieces in
from two to five weeks. Tissues hardened in Miiller’s fluid and
carbolic acid should be transferred to methylated spirit at the end of
five or six weeks, after being washed in distilled water for twenty-
four hours. All sections, whether of fresh or of hardened tissues,
should be thoroughly washed in absolute alcohol before they are
stained (Gram), and sections to be kept for any length of time
before they are mounted are best preserved in the same medium.

METHOD OF ILLUMINATION.

84. As some of the organisms to be examined are exceedingly
minute, it is only by the greatest care and with the aid of the most
perfect illuminating apparatus that many of them can be recognised,
and when their presence is recognised, their position in the tissues can
often be determined only by carefully modifying the light and other
conditions. The recognised combination in Germany is Zeiss’ jth
inch oil immersion lens and an Abbe’s illuminator,.and this undoubt-
edly combines most of the requisite conditions. The condenser has a
very short focus, and must therefore be brought as near to the under
surface of the glass as possible. It may then be used as an ordinary
condenser if the lateral or greatly converged rays be cut off by
means of a diaphragm with a small aperture, placed below. If
a large aperture in the diaphragm be used, the greatly converged
rays of light are also allowed to play on the structures, which are
lighted from all points, all shadows disappear, and the “ structural

PHOTOGRAPHY. 49

picture” is lost. As the structural picture is lost, however, the stained
elements, such as the micro-organisms and the nuclei, are brought
out prominently and can be carefully examined. All preparations
should be examined with both the small and the large apertures be-
neath the condenser. With the small aperture, the structural elements
are observed and the positions of the organisms; as the apertures are
increased in size, the organisms become more and more prominent,
whilst the structural elements gradually disappear from view. Even
when no micro-organisms can be found in fluids and tissues examined
under ordinary conditions, they may still be present and may be
brought into view by the use of the above optical combination.

Messrs. Powell & Lealand make an equally good combination, some
authorities even preferring their ;4,th in oil immersion to Zeiss’ glass. *
They also make a 34th in oil immersion which is an excellent glass,
but such a power is of comparatively little use except for very special
work,

PHOTOGRAPHY.

35. Photography is now in many cases called to the aid of the ob-
server, and to help to record with accuracy what can be seen under the
microscope. Koch, by his admirable series of photo-micrographs,
has proved that most valuable results may be obtained by this method,
and that features which may escape observation under the micro-
scope come out prominently in a photograph, especially in enlarge-
ments. He uses wet or collodion plates, hence his apparatus,
consisting of Heliostat, condensers and the rest, is somewhat compli-
cated. For the ordinary worker the dry plate process gives sufficiently
good results, and with much less trouble and far simpler apparatus.
Koch works without an eye-piece, but this appears to be a matter of
detail, as many workers prefer to use it. We have found that with
an oxy-hydrogen light, or even with an incandescent electric lamp, it
is perfectly easy to use the eye-piece and a jth inch objective (Zeiss’
homogeneous immersion), with which arrangement it is found
practicable to have a comparatively short camera, and the necessity

1 «*Traumatic Infective Diseases,” Koch, 1880. (German, 1878.)
2 “Practical Histology and Pathology,” Heneage Gibbes, 2nd ed., 1884.
D

50° METHODS OF EXAMINATION.

for any adjustment, except that on the microscope, is done away with.
Even an ordinary argand gas-burner gives sufficient light for systems
magnifying up to about 400 diameters.

In working with high powers it is necessary to concentrate the light
as much as possible, for which purpose two condensers are used—
one to bring the rays parallel, and a second to bring them to a focus
on the mirror, or directly on the specimen.

All that is necessary is a flat board, to which the camera is
screwed (an ordinary wooden camera is quite good enough). Around
the aperture in the front of the camera is a cloth tube with an
elastic ring, which’ fits over the eye-piece of the microscope.
The microscope is clamped by means of thumb-screws to a
Piece of board firmly fixed at right angles to that on which the
camera rests, and so far away that when the tube is pushed in it
leaves the projecting ring or shoulder of the eye-piece tube within the
elastic band. This apparatus may be used in a horizontal position,
where the specimens to be photographed are firmly fixed, as in the
case of tissues mounted in balsam, in which position the light is most
readily managed, but by simply having a couple of hooks at the
camera end of the board, the whole apparatus may be hung against
a wall, and the slide is kept perfectly horizontal, in which position
fluids or unfixed specimens may be easily photographed. One great
advantage connected with this apparatus is that as the specimen can
be searched, and the exact.point to be photographed fixed before
the microscope is clamped to the foot-board, no mechanical stage
is necessary. The best photographs are obtained of specimens that
have been stained brown, hence, as Koch suggests, Bismarck brown,
vesuvin, or chrysoidin should be used as the staining reagents.
Fairly good results, however, are frequently obtained from un-
stained preparations, and even from preparations stained with
eosin, or others of the aniline colours; and as certain micro-
organisms can only be stained with actinic colours, contrasts must
often be called to our aid, double-staining being especially useful
in such cases.

The mounting reagent must be as free from colour (yellow) as
possible ; this is of even greater importance than absolute transparency.
The best medium is a saturated solution of acetate of potash; after

APPARATUS AND REAGENTS. 5t

this come glycerine and dammar varnish, but Canada balsam, which
has almost invariably a yellow tinge, should be absolutely tabooed.

APPARATUS AND REAGENTS.

36. In addition to the ordinary apparatus and reagents, the fol-

lowing should always be kept near at hand and ready for use :—

Clean cover-glasses.

A couple of platinum needles (Fig. 21).

A pair of platinum-pointed forceps (Fig. 10).

A Bunsen’s burner, or a spirit lamp.

A number of watch-glasses and shallow glass dishes.

A white porcelain slab or tile.

A large flat dish—glass or porcelain.

A couple of wide-mouthed glass stoppered bottles ; one containing
caustic potash, the other containing turpentine. Old slides
and cover-glasses are transferred to these fluids, one or other
of which will dissolve most of the mounting reagents.

A wash bottle containing distilled water.

Fic. 12.—Small narrow-mouthed bottle fitted with funnel filter,
used especially for aniline staining fluids and aniline water.

A number of small glass funnels and filter papers.

Plenty of white filter or blotting paper.

Test-tubes and rack.

Bottles (Fig. 12) to hold stains. Each bottle has, instead of a
stopper or cork, a small glass funnel and filter paper, through

METHODS OF EXAMINATION.

which the fluid may be filtered, and which serves to keep out
dust from the bottle.

Three or four small filter ring-stands.

A large bottle of three-quarter per cent. salt solution, which has
been carefully boiled.

Acetic acid ; one in four.

Glacial acetic acid.

Nitric acid, pure.

Hydrochloric acid, pure.

Carbonate of potash solution.

Caustic potash solution, forty per cent.

Strong ammonia.

Ether.

Chloroform.

‘Alcohol, methylated.

Alcohol, anhydrous.

Perchloride of mercury solution, one per cent.

Saturated or ten per cent. solution of acetate of potash.

Osmic acid, half per cent., kept in a wide-mouthed bottle covered
with brown paper.

A saturated solution of aniline oil in water. Prepared as follows :—

Aniline oil, . ; F ; I part.
Distilled water, ; f 3 parts.

Shake well every half hour for three or four hours, and
decant the water as the oil settles to the bottom. The com-
mercial aniline may be used instead of the pure form, as it is
only about one-twelfth of the price, and answers almost as well.

Watery solutions of the aniline dyes, especially gentian violet,
methyl violet, methyl blue, chrysoidin, vesuvin, and magenta.
Any of these may be used as a half to two per cent. solu-
tion. They should be kept in the filter bottles, in each of
which a crystal of thymol should be placed.

Saturated alcoholic solutions of gentian violet, fuchsin, eosin, and
other dyes, if necessary. These should be kept in well stop-
pered bottles, but should be filtered before they are used. A
crystal of thymol should be added.

Weigert’s picro-carmine solution (Griibler, Leipzig).

APPARATUS AND REAGENTS. 53

Bismarck brown.
(a.) Dissolved in equal parts of glycerine and alcohol.
(6.) Dissolved in glycerine, two to four per cent. solution.

(c.) Aniline brown, . ; : j I part.
Alcohol, anhydrous, . , : ro parts.
Distilled water, : . Too parts.

The (c) solution answers best for most purposes, though
either of the above does well. The more dilute the stain, and
the longer the staining process, the better the results.

Cedar oil, clove oil, bergamot oil, and xylol.

Turpentine.

Glycerine.

Darnmar varnish.

Canada balsam dissolved in turpentine, benzole, or xylol.

Summary of Process of Examination of Fluids or Tissues for
Micro-organisms.

87. Examine in a fresh condition fluid scraped from an organ or
taken from a cultivation (§ 31, p. 45). Treat with various reagents
(§ 21, p. 24). Dry and coagulate by heat and stain (§ 22, p. 26), or
stain by His’s method, if there is no albumen in the fluid (§ 32,
p. 46).

Stain with methyl blue (watery solution) or some other aniline
staining fluid, and mount at once in glycerine.

It is often a good plan to overstain, and then, before mounting,
to wash out the excess of stain with a dilute solution (ten per cent.)
of acetic acid.

After staining, wash off excess of fluid or of acid with distilled water
(Fig. 13). Examine the specimen at once, or dry and mount in
balsam.

Examiné fresh sections or pieces teased out, both unstained (§ 21,
p. 24) and stained (§ 24, p. 31, and § 25, p. 35); use various re-
agents (§ 21, p. 25).

Harden pieces of the tissue (§ 33, p. 47), and cut sections.

Soak in absolute alcohol.

Stain with gentian violet (§ 25, p. 35).

Wash in iodine and iodide of potassium ‘solution (§ 25, p. 35).

54 METHODS OF EXAMINATION.

Then wash in alcohol.
Transfer to alcoholic eosin solution (saturated).

Fic. 13.—Diagram to show method of washing off extra stain.
a. Wash bottle.
6. Cover-glass held in platinum-pointed spring forceps.

Clear up in bergamot or cedar oil.

Mount in xylol balsam. '

Other methods, to which reference has been made, may also be
used, but the above gives the most constant and satisfactory results.

For special bacteria, such as tubercle bacilli, typhoid bacilli, and
others, special methods of treatment must be adopted (§ 26, p. 37 ¢
Seq.).

NV. B.—Make a drawing of all micro-organisms about which your knowledge is

not accurate, as they may have faded from view when next you come to examine
them.

CHAPTER IT.
SOLID CULTIVATION MEDIA.

NUTRIENT SOILS.

38. To cultivate any organism artificially, apart from the tissue of its
host, it must be supplied with a nutrient soil, which will support its
vital necessities, and which is perfectly free from the presence of any
other organism. If the soil be lacking in the former respect, the
organism rapidly dies from inanition; if in the latter, a struggle for
existence occurs between the organism already present and that
newly implanted, and one or other is shortly exterminated, or each is
modified in many respects from the close contact of so near a
neighbour. Perfect sterility of the soil is therefore a sine gua non for
the successful artificial culture of organisms.

The nutrient soil used may be either a liquid or a solid; and
certain facilities of observation are offered by one or the other in the
case of different organisms. The employment of solid media is now
generally adopted, for in them an organism frequently exhibits speci-
fically characteristic methods of growth in a way which is not attain-
able where liquids are used. On the other hand, speaking generally,
organisms grow with greater rapidity in liquids than in solids, and
thus sooner reach their state of maturity, and the transparency of
most liquids so used affords facility in making observations, which is
not the case with many of the solid materials. A few solid media,
however, have been devised, in which the great advantage of trans-
parency has been attained, and these offer such a series of advantages
over other methods that they are now very largely employed in:
making observations. Their advantages are as follows :—

1. Convenience in manipulation: can be inverted (see footnote,

p. 90, on gravitation of germs).

2. Slower growth of organisms, allowing more complete observation

of the various stages of development.

56 SOLID CULTIVATION MEDIA.

.3. Specific peculiarities in the mode of growth are more marked
than in the liquid media. In some solids (eg., gelatine) the
naked eye appearances are in many cases absolutely diagnostic
of the presence of different species.

In the present chapter, the preparation of solid media, such as are
most frequently employed, will be considered, and each step in the
process will be described seriatim. The nutrient qualities of the soil
differ in the case of each solid used, some materials being specially
suited to the maintenance of one form of organism, others of another.
Sterility of the soil is insured by the employment of heat, the most
powerful sterilising agent at command. It may be attained either by
the application of a very great heat for a short time, or by prolonged
exposure to a much lower temperature. The action of steam at
100°C. is specially powerful in this direction ; a comparatively short
period of exposure to this being sufficient to effect complete sterility.
As compared with dry heat at the same temperature, it is greatly
more potent, probably from the fact that in the hot air the germs
merely become perfectly dry, in which state they may be able to
resist a very high temperature. When moistened by the aqueous
vapour, they are much more susceptible to the germicidal action of
heat, which in all probability produces coagulation of some element
essential to their life. The heat thus employed must be adapted in
its character to the nature of the material to be sterilised, substances
that might become too dry being steamed; others, where partial
evaporation is desirable, being sterilised in a hot air chamber.

A particular account of the modes of preparation follows, accom-
panied in each case by the methods of inoculation for artificial culture,
and the chief uses which each method of culture subserves.

(A.) CULTIVATION ON STERILISED POTATOES.

39. For this purpose medium-sized potatoes, oval in shape and
regular in contour, are selected. After a thorough washing in water,
any excrescences are removed, and a preliminary purification is effected

1 According to Pasteur, the spores of Penci//éum and other common mucedines
are not destroyed by a temperature of 120 to 125° C. ix the absence of moisture (see
“ Bacteria,” Magnin and Sternberg, p. 171).

STERILISED POTATOES. 57

by soaking them in a half per cent. solution of perchloride of
mercury for three quarters of an hour; they are then rinsed in
distilled water and are submitted to the
action of the “steam steriliser,” as
devised by Koch (Fig. 14), © This con-
sists of a cylindrical tin receiver, pro-
vided with a conical lid, and covered
completely with a closely fitting jacket
of felt, to avoid too rapid radiation of
heat. Internally, at the junction of the
lower and ‘middle thirds of the re-
ceiver, is a perforated diaphragm, which
separates the lower or water chamber
from the upper or steam chamber. The
water chamber is furnished with a strong
floor to withstand the heat of a powerful
gas burner applied beneath it ; and the
steam thus generated in the lower
chamber passes through the perforated
diaphragm, and fills the steam chamber
above. ‘The water chamber is provided
with a side register tube to indicate the
depth of water present in it, which should
never be less than three or four inches.
The conical lid of the steriliser is per- FIG. 14.--‘‘ Steam steriliser.”
: , a. Diaphragm.
forated at its apex to admit the stem 4 Water chamber.
and bulb of a thermometer, which regis: |“ Steam chamber, in which
: is potato receiver with
ters the temperature to which the con- perforated floor.
tentsof the steam chamber are subjected.

Into the upper chamber can be lowered the potato-holder, a
cylindrical tin receptacle, with a perforated floor, which fits loosely
within the steam steriliser, and, resting on the perforated diaphragm,
allows its contents to be exposed to the steam as it rises from.the
lower to the upper chamber. The potato-holder is charged with the
requisite number of previously purified potatoes, and is placed in the
steriliser when the contained steam has reached close upon 100° C.
The potatoes are left for thirty minutes (a few minutes more or less

58 SOLID CULTIVATION MEDIA.

respectively, if the potatoes are of very large or small size) in this
position, and the water must be kept boiling the whoie of that time.

Fic. 15.—Bacillus anthracis growing on sterilised potato. The
growth has a succulent appearance, and forms an elevated plateau
with rounded edges.

The potato-holder is now removed, and is placed on a layer of filter
paper, soaked with a one per cent. solution of perchloride of mercury,
to prevent contamination from the ingress of germs from below
carried by currents of heated air, whilst the lid is very slightly raised
at one side to allow the steam to escape, and at the same time to
prevent access of germs from above.

Whilst they are thus cooling, preparations must be made for
receiving the potatoes into sterile chambers. Shallow glass bells (Fig.
17) are prepared for their reception, by thoroughly rinsing them
with the corrosive sublimate solution (HgCl, 1°/,). The lower half
of each bell is provided with a double layer of filter paper, which
accurately fits its floor, and this is also soaked with the same solution.
The bell thus prepared is allowed to stand an hour or-two before
use, to permit of subsidence of dust and spores in the contained air,
and is kept carefully closed till the moment when the sterile potatoes
are introduced.

| STERILISED POTATOES. of)

In the meantime, also, a series of knives, equal in number to the
potatoes to be used, must be prepared to divide the sterile potatoes,

Fic. 16.—Pink Torula growing on sterilised potato. The rose-
coloured pigment is contained within the cells of the growth, each of
which possesses a delicate yellow tint under the microscope. The
faint white film on the surface of the growth is due to an accidental
concomitant (a small dacéd/es).

without at the same time in any way contaminating the cut surface.
| For this purpose, ordinary kitchen knives are employed, without any

Fic. 17.—Glass dish and bell for sterilised potatoes.
rim at the back of the blade, which can thus slip through the steamed
potato mass with but slight disturbance to it. A separate knife is to

60 SOLID CULTIVATION MEDIA.

be used for each potato, and, immediately before use the blade must
be heated red hot, and then placed to cool, with its edge upwards,

Fic. 18.—Micrococcus of acute osteo-myelitis growing on sterilised
potato. The yellow pigment consists of irregular granules, which lie
around and not within the individual cells of the growth.

projecting over the side of a table, so as to offer as small a surface
as possible to the gravitating atmospheric germs.

The potatoes being now cool enough for manipulation, the operator
cleanses his hands thoroughly with corrosive solution (1-1000), and,
getting an assistant to raise the lid slightly for a moment in a verti-
cal direction, removes one potato from the holder. ‘The potato is
grasped in its shortest diameter (see Fig. 20), and, thus held, it is cut
through in its longest diameter by a single steady sweep of one of the
sterilised knives. The assistant now raises the lid of one of the
sterile bells, slowly and perpendicularly, and when the knife has all
but completely divided the potato, the latter is laid on its side on the
floor of the chamber, and its upper cut half is opened up, hinge-like,
by the blade of the knife, and laid alongside the lower half of the
potato with its large smooth-cut surface upwards. The cut sur-

STERILISED POTATOES. 61

faces of the potato have thus only come in contact with the blade of
a knife immediately previously sterilised, and the risks of contamina-

Fic. 19.—Growth of Aficrococcus prodigiosus on sterilised potato.
The brilliant growth stands out very sharply from the slightly dis-
coloured and cracked potato.

Fic. 20.—Method of dividing sterilised potatoes.

tion are minimised. The knife is now rapidly withdrawn, and the
bell jar replaced.

62

SOLID CULTIVATION MEDIA.

ty

Summary of Process for preparing Sterile Potatoes.

Cleanse potatoes.

Steep in one-half per cent. solution of corrosive sublimate for forty-

five minutes.

Rinse with distilled water.

Steam for thirty minutes at 100° C.

Divide with knives which have been previously heated red hot.

Place in sterile bell jars, purified with one per cent. solution of
corrosive sublimate.

INOCULATION OF POTATOES,

40. Such potatoes should either be inoculated at once with seed
material, or allowed to stand under observation for four days before this

Fic. 21.—Platinum wires
used for making inoculations.

a, Straight wire for inocu-
lating ae bread
paste, &c.

4, Looped wire for liquids.

c. Hooked wire for inocu-
lating solidified blood
serum and potatoes,

d. Bottle, with wadding on
which glass rods rest.

is done. In the former case the implanted
organisms have the start of any which may
have gained access during the processes of
preparation or of inoculation. In the latter,
if no reaction take place, one may be quite
sure that the soil to be inoculated is per-
fectly sterile. In inoculating sterile pota-
toes, as also the various other soils, for the’
growth of organisms subsequently to be
described, a platinum wire mounted upon
a glass rod (see Fig. 21) is used. This is
sterilised immediately before use by heating
it white hot in the flame of a Bunsen burner.
The upper part of the glass rod is also
heated. In a few seconds the wire is cool
enough to be used without damaging the
seed material, which it is to transfer to the
sterile potato surface. The wire, sterilised
and charged with a small quantity of the
seed material, is held in one hand ; with the
other the operator slowly raises the upper
glass bell at one side, so as just to allow of
the entrance of the wire. The end of the
wire is now rubbed gently upon the centre

INOCULATION OF POTATOES. 63

of the cut potato surface, and the seed material is thus implanted in the
sterile nutrient soil (see Fig. 22). The wire is then withdrawn, and the

Fig. 22.—Inoculation of potatoes.

bell jar closed. Note is taken of the date and the substance inocu-
lated, and the potatoes are set aside for subsequent observation.

As a general rule, those organisms which are adapted for cul-
tivation on potato are capable of growing actively at ordinary
températures. In any special case, where it is desired to incubate
organisms growing on this soil, the bell jar, with its contents, must be
placed in 4 warmer room, or in one of the larger sizes of incubator
subsequently-to be described. Incubation at high temperature is not
so desirable in the case of potatoes-as in that of some other soils,
for they become dry superficially, and thus lose their special adapta-
bility to the growth of organisms.

(B&.) CULTIVATION ON STERILE BREAD Paste.

41. Slight differences in the chemical constitution of a nutrient soil
often determine its suitability, or otherwise, for the growth of an
organism ; certain species, which thrive but slightly on potato, are
found to flourish luxuriantly when supplied with other forms of starch,
as that from cereals. A convenient soil for such organisms is sup-
plied by bread paste. This is made simply of bread crumb and
water. A stale loaf is thoroughly dried in an oven; then all the
crust is removed, and the remainder is finely powdered. Small
clean one-eighth litre Bohemian flasks are charged each with ten
grammes of the bread crumb, and to this is added 2°5 cc. of dis-

64 SOLID CULTIVATION MEDIA.

tilled water. The flasks are provided with compact cotton wool
plugs. To make these, a square piece is taken from a sheet of

Fic, 23.—Mucor Lichthetmi growing on bread paste,
On the surface of the delicate growth, small translucent yellow
beads of liquid (whichs give an alkaline reaction) are seen.

cotton wool, and the corners consecutively turned inwards towards
the centre, till a firm round mass is produced. This is pushed into

STERILE BREAD PASTE. 65

the neck of the flask, with its smooth compact end downwards, which
adapts itself closely to the smooth inner surface of the neck of the

r

Fic. 24.—Aspergil/us albus growing on bread paste.

flask. When such a flask has been sterilised, the firm plug acts as a
mechanical filter, allowing free interchange of air between the atmo-
E

66 SOLID CULTIVATION MEDIA.

sphere inside and that outside the flask, but preventing all ingress of
germs from without. The preparation of these plugs is a matter of

Fic. 25.—Aspergillus repens growing on bread paste—commencing growth.
great importance, for upon their effectiveness as filters depends the
purity of artificial cultures, not only in this special mode of cultiva-
tion, but in several of those to be mentioned subsequently.

STERILE BREAD PASTE. 67

The steam steriliser is now prepared, and when the water is boiling
the flasks are placed in the steam chamber, where they remain for

Fic. 26.—Aspergillus repens growing on bread paste (extension of surface of
growth causing undulations.)

half an hour. They are then removed, and placed in an ice-press for
twenty-four hours, and then once more steamed for thirty minutes.

68 SOLID CULTIVATION MEDIA.

Their sterility is now attained; but to obviate any risk of its being
incomplete, it is well to keep them under observation for a week be-
fore using them; when, if no reaction has occurred, they may safely
be employed as sterile soil.

INOCULATION OF BREAD PASTE.

42. The platinum wire already described is used for the in-
oculation. A flask containing sterile bread paste is inverted, and
held thus in the left hand (see Fig. 27). Its cotton wool plug is
then twisted round, to break down any adhesions between it and

Fic. 27.—Inoculation of bread paste.

the neck of the flask, and is then withdrawn, and held between two
fingers of the same hand, with its lower end pointing towards the
ground. This arrangement is to avoid risks from the gravitation of
germs through the atmosphere. The platinum wire is now sterilised,
charged with seed material, and its tip repeatedly plunged into the
mass of paste at the bottom of the sterile flask, It is then withdrawn,

INOCULATION OF BREAD PASTE. 69

the flask plugged, and only then is it restored to its upright position.

During all these manipulations the operator is careful not to breathe

Fic. 28.—Aspergil.us nigrescens growing on bread paste.
upon the flask, plug, or inoculating wire, and his hands are previously
washed in a 1 per 1000 solution of perchloride of mercury, to destroy

7° SOLID CULTIVATION MEDIA.

germs which might be carried upwards into the flask with the hot air
currents which are constantly rising from all the free surfaces of the

Fic. 29. —Micrococcus of osteo-myelitis growing on bread paste.

body.! The inoculated bread paste may with advantage be incubated
at summer or at blood heat, in any of the forms of incubator em-

1 «Essays on the Floating Matter of the Air in relation to Putrefaction and
Infection ”’—Tyndall : London, 1881.

INOCULATION OF BREAD PASTE. 71

ployed. Most organisms will also grow upon this soil at ordinary
temperatures, but more slowly than when incubated. By slightly

Fic. 30,—Black Zorw/a growing on bread paste.

varying the proportion of water in the process of preparation, a more
or less succulent paste can be produced, and the requirements of a

72 SOLID CULTIVATION MEDIA.

variety of organisms thus met. This form of soil is specially adapted
for the growth of the various species of moulds—A sfergilli, Mucores,
and Penicillia.

Summary of Process for preparing Sterile Bread Paste.

Furst Day.—Place ten grammes bread crumb and 2'5 c.c. water ina
glass flask. Plug with cotton wool.
Steam flask at 100° C. for thirty minutes.
Second Day.—Repeat steaming for thirty minutes.

(C.) CutrivaTion IN STERILE NuTRIENT JELLY.

43. In the nutrient soils already described we have had to deal
with an opaque substratum, on which only the surface appearances of
the cultivated organism can be distinguished. In order that the more
intimate relations and tendencies of the growth may be observed, it
is desirable that some material should be devised which combines
sufficiently nourishing qualities with solidity and transparency.
These conditions are realised by the peptonised meat jelly devised
by Koch, in which a highly concentrated meat infusion is rendered
solid by the admixture of gelatine, its nutrient qualities enhanced by
the addition of peptones, and its perfect transparency ensured by
careful filtration, or, if need be, by clarification. The method of its
preparation is as follows :—To two pounds of finely minced lean meat
(pork or beef by preference) are added two litres of distilled water.
‘These are well stirred together, and allowed to stand for twenty-four
hours in acool place. The fat, which separates and floats on the
surface, is then removed with a creaming ladle or clean filter paper,
and the residue is poured into the cavity of a screw press (Fig. 31),
lined with a fine cotton cloth, through which the liquid portions
are strained, and collected in a large glass flask. The mass of meat
thus left is closely wrapped in the piece of cloth, and is subjected to
repeated pressure in the screw press, so as to deprive it of all remain-
ing liquid.

By this means a turbid red broth is obtained, which should
measure two litres. If it measure less than this, add some distilled

PEPTONISED MEAT JELLY. 73

water to the solid residue in the cloth, and express all moisture
from the mass once more, adding sufficient of the liquid thus obtained

Fic. 31.-—Screw press for extracting meat infusion for Koch’s jelly.

to make up the bulk of the broth to two litres. Put the two litres of
broth in a four-litre flask, and add to it roo grammes (z., five per cent.)
of best table gelatine, 10 grammes (0°5 per cent.) of dry albumen
peptone, and 5 grammes (0°25 per cent.) of common salt. The fine
photographic gelatine now so much in use is not suitable for the
purpose, as it does not give the requisite solidity, unless used in a
much larger proportion. The gelatine must be of the best French
variety (blue and gold label), prepared by “ The Gelatine Manufac-
turing Company,” Paris. The gelatine mixture is now stirred, and its
reaction tested. This is nearly always found to be distinctly acid, which
is not favourable to the growth of most organisms.! If the mixture be

1 Certain genera (moulds) grow best in slightly acid solutions ; others (¢.g.,
Bacterium termo and its congeners) in an alkaline solution; and others (chiefly
the group of micrococci) in neutral solutions. ‘

74 SOLID CULTIVATION MEDIA.

acid, it must be neutralised by the addition of a saturated solution of
carbonate or alkaline phosphate of soda. This must be done very
accurately, and is best accomplished by using pieces of red and blue
litmus paper, adding the alkali in small quantities to the gelatine broth,
until an exactly similar tint is produced in each test paper on its
immersion in the liquid. As soon as its contents are completely
neutral in reaction, the flask is stoppered with a plug of sterile cotton
wool, and is placed in the steam steriliser already described (§ 39, p. 57),
which has been previously raised to a temperature of 100° C. Here
the flask and its contents are steamed for thirty minutes, after which
they are allowed to stand for twenty-four hours in acold place. On the
third day of the preparatory process the flask is again steamed for thirty
minutes, and while still liquid the contents are once more tested, and
more of the soda solution added, if they prove acid. If already
slightly alkaline, the broth may be left without further treatment, as
slight alkalinity of the soil is not unfavourable to the growth of many
species of micro-organisms. Whilst still liquid, the peptonised broth
should be filtered through coarse filter paper in a heated funnel

Fic. 32.— Hot water funnel for filtering meat jelly.

(see Fig. 32). This consists of a glass funnel, the neck of which fits
into an indiarubber plug, and around which is a copper funnel of

PEPTONISED MEAT JELLY. 75

larger dimensions, fitting as a collar, and leaving an iieiepaee be-
tween the two funnels, which acts as a water chamber. Hot water
is placed in this chamber, and its heat maintained by the application
of a Bunsen burner to a copper diverticulum connected with its
cavity. The filter paper is washed with boiled distilled water, to
remove any fine separable particles from it; and the gelatine solution
first passed through it is reserved for a second filtering, so as to
secure a perfectly pellucid filtrate. During the process of filtra-
tion the funnel is kept covered with a glass plate or bell, to prevent
ingress of dust from the air. The filtrate is received into sterile
glass flasks, stoppered with sterile cotton wool plugs. These are pre-
pared as follows :—The flasks (one quarter litre) are thoroughly washed
and dried, and then plugged with cotton wool. The stoppered empty
flasks are then submitted to a dry heat of 170° C. for an hour, which
effects their complete sterility. The plug is then removed from the
mouth of one of these sterile flasks, and held with a pair of catch
forceps, so that it touches no other object, its lower aspect at the same
time being directed downwards, so as to avoid deposition upon it of the
dust particles settling from the air. The flask is placed below the filter,
and the gelatine is allowed to pass into it till it is about one-quarter full.
It is then quickly plugged, and another flask introduced in its place. A
flask so charged with gelatine broth is called a stock-flask. The flasks,
thus charged with the clear filtrate, and at once plugged with cotton,
are then placed in the steriliser and steamed for twenty minutes. If
they are as much as half full, there is danger of the contents rising as
. high as the cotton wool plug, whence during the steaming process a
quantity of particles may be washed down, which interfere with the
perfect transparency of the nutrient jelly. Ifthe filtrate is not per-
fectly clear, it must either be refiltered, or it must be clarified with
egg albumen. This is effected as follows :—-The white and shell of an
egg are beaten up into a frothy mass, and added to the whole supply
of turbid gelatine broth. This is then placed in the steam steriliser,
and steamed until coagulation of the egg albumen takes place. By
the action of heat all the egg albumen is precipitated, and it carries
down with it the fine particles suspended in the broth, and leaves,
when separated by filtration, a perfectly clear nutrient substance. At
the end of the third day’s steaming, the gelatine broth, now in stock-

76 SOLID CULTIVATION MEDIA.

flasks, is placed once more in a cold place for twenty-four hours. On
the fourth and fifth days the jelly is again steamed for a quarter of an
hour each day, standing in the intervals of heating in a cold place.
The process of sterilisation is now complete. This process is based
on Tyndall’s principle of sterilising by the employment of discon-
tinuous heat; only here the partial loss of watery elements which
necessarily accompanies ebullition is avoided by the use of the steam
steriliger, which prevents all evaporation, and is equally effective in
producing sterility. Klein recommends that a glass cap should be
used to prevent the deposition of dust on the cotton wadding plug.

Summary of Process for preparing Sterile Nutrient Jelly.

First Day.—Steep two pounds of meat in two litres of water for
twenty-four hours.

Second Day.—Extract, and filter broth. It should measure two litres.

Add 10o grammes gelatine, 10 grammes albumen

peptone, and 5 grammes common salt.
Neutralise with carbonate of soda (sat. sol.).
_ Steam at 100°C. for thirty minutes.

Third Day.—Steam thirty minutes ; filter through hot water filter

into stock-flasks; steam in stock-flasks twenty

”

”

minutes.
Fourth Day.—Steam stock-flasks fifteen minutes.
Fifth Day.—Steam stock-flasks fifteen minutes.

In addition to the formula given above for preparing a nutrient
jelly, the following will be found useful (modified from Klein) :—

Distilled water, : . - 100 parts.
Beef peptones (Savory and ioe: : F 2 parts.
Cane sugar, . : : ‘ ‘ I part.

Gelatine, , i 4 To parts.?

Dissolve, neutralise with Sana of one solution, and then sterilise
by discontinuous steaming as above.

1 Owing to the presence of sugar in this formula, a large percentage of gelatine
is required to render the material solid at ordinary temperatures,

NUTRIENT JELLY IN TEST-TUBES. Ee

Another valuable formula is as follows :—:

Darby’s fluid meat (peptonised), ; : I part.
Distilled water, ‘ ‘ : . oo parts.
Gelatine, ‘ : : ; ‘ 5 parts.

Neutralise, and sterilise as above.

METHODS OF EMPLOYING STERILE NUTRIENT JELLY.
(A.) La Test-Tubes.

44. The test-tubes are first prepared by thorough cleansing, and then
plugged with firm cotton wool plugs, and heated for an hour to 170°C.

Fic, 33.-~Hot air chamber for sterilising glass, wadding, and other
apparatus.
a. Hot air chamber containing test-tubes and flasks,
4, Wire basket containing test-tubes to be sterilised.
‘When hung upon a wall, a sheet of asbestos should intervene be-
tween the apparatus and the wall,

in the dry air steriliser (see Fig. 33). When cool, they are ready

78 SOLID CULTIVATION MEDIA.

to be charged with the nutrient jelly. The contents of one of the
sterile stock-flasks are liquefied by heating, and a glass pipette is
sterilised preparatory to transferring some of the stock jelly to the
test-tubes. The pipette is either superheated in the flame of a
Bunsen burner, or exposed to a temperature of 170° C. in the dry air
steriliser for an hour, or it may be thoroughly washed, first with a
mercuric perchloride solution (aqueous 1 in 1000), and then in
absolute alcohol, and dried. The sterile pipette is introduced into
one of the stock-flasks, and 10 c.c. of the liquefied contents drawn
up into it by suction. The upper end of the pipette is then stoppered
by the finger to prevent its contents from: escaping, until they are
introduced into one of the sterile test-tubes. The sterile plug is
removed from one of these, and the liquefied jelly is allowed to
flow slowly to the bottom of the tube, care being taken that the liquid
do not touch the sides of the tube in its descent. The cotton
wool plug is then returned, and the tube, with its contents, is
placed upright, and allowed to cool. The ro c.c. of jelly which the
tube contains soon solidifies, and the tubes thus prepared, if they
show no reaction after the lapse of a-week, may be assumed to be
sterile, and used as a cultivating soil for micro-organisms. If the
atmosphere is densely germ-laden (as during the summer and autumn
months), the transference of jelly from the stock-flasks to test-tubes
should be effected under the carbolic spray,! or the test-tubes, when

1 The question as to whether the carbolic spray is a reliable means of prevent-
ing contamination in cultivations in those manipulations which necessitate a free
access of the atmosphere to the sterile media, is one of great importance. During
certain periods of the year the atmosphere is so densely germ-laden as to render it
a matter of the greatest difficulty to prevent septic contamination. Our experience
proves that if an efficient spray be employed, this danger can be entirely avoided.
The spray used must produce a vapour in which carbolic acid is present at least
in the proportion of one part to thirty parts of water. A spray. cloud of this
strength is an efficient antiseptic, and, applied under these conditions, the steam
spray is a weapon of precision that may be thoroughly depended on. And in
judging of the efficiency of an antiseptic for these purposes, a sufficient standard of
comparison is supplied by the ordinary spores usually present in the atmosphere ;
for if an antiseptic be powerful enough to destroy these, it should be considered
efficient, and its potency should not be judged by its ability or inability to destroy
certain rare and very resistant living structures, such as the spores of Bacillus
anthracis, A comparison based on the latter data is to some extent misleading, and
has tended to throw discredit on some antiseptics which: general experience has
proved to be useful and reliable.

NUTRIENT JELLY IN TEST-TUBES. 79

charged, should be once more submitted to ten minutes steaming on
each of two successive days, by which is avoided the danger of con-
tamination by the atmosphere, during the manipulative process.

The stock of test-tubes thus prepared is kept under observation for
seven or eight days before it is used asa cultivating medium. If any
organisms have gained access to the jelly in the process of prepara-
tion, they will become apparent during this period by altering its
appearance. In this way can be excluded any danger of the develop-
ment of foreign elements alongside the special cultures established in
the test-tubes, which would render useless any results obtained. The
method of inoculating the nutrient jelly is as follows :—A short piece
of platinum wire is mounted on a solid glass rod (see Fig. 21), and is
sterilised by heating to a white heat in the flame of a Bunsen burner.
It is then allowed to cool, without touching any free surface, whence
it might derive contaminating matter. After it is loaded with a
minute trace of the seed material, the organisms contained in which
it is desired to cultivate, it is introduced into the sterile tube. The
test-tube is held inverted in the left hand (§ 42, p. 68), and the plug of
cotton wool is twisted once or twice in the mouth of the test-tube,
to break down any adhesions between it and the neck of the tube
which might prevent its rapid removal.1_ The plug is then removed
from the mouth of the test-tube, and held between two of the un-
occupied fingers of the left hand (see Fig. 34), care being taken that
no part of it which passes within the test-tube comes in contact with
any source of infection other than the air itself; at the same time
this portion of the plug is directed downwards in order to avoid the
germs gravitating through the atmosphere. The platinum wire is now
plunged twice or thrice into the gelatine mass, and gently removed,
so that two or three linear tracts are produced in which the particles
of the inoculated material are deposited in a widely dispersed con-
dition ; and along the linear tracts thus produced, appearances may be
subsequently observed, which in many cases are characteristic of the
special kind of seed material which has been sown. The platinum

1 If the plugs are dusty, it is well to burn the outer surface of the plug
by passing it rapidly through a flame before removing it from the test-tube,
The wadding burns very rapidly, and must be extinguished at once.

80 SOLID CULTIVATION MEDIA,

wire is now withdrawn, and the cotton wool plug is firmly replaced in
All these manipulations must be carried

the mouth of the test-tube.

4

Fie 34.—Method of inoculation in,test-tubes containing nutrient

jelly.

a, Cultivation in jelly, from which inoculation is to be made.

6. Tube containing sterile jelly, into which the straight needle is
introduced.

c. Cotton wadding plugs held between the tips of the fingers.
«(The hand is held in such a position that these plugs have

their smooth surfaces downwards.)
out in a perfectly still atmosphere, or under the protection of the
carbolic spray. The latter method specially offers many advantages :

NUTRIENT JELLY IN TEST-TUBES. 81

organisms inoculated in the antiseptic vapour do not there-
by lose their vitality, while, if the spray be an efficient one, all

Fic. 35. FIG, 36.

Fic. 35.—Growth of violet bacillus in nutrient jelly. The growth
commences first near the surface, along the track of the needle.
Liquefaction rapidly takes place, the liquefied material forming a
kind of inverted cone, the apex of which is made up of small beads
or globes, in which the violet masses of bacillus are deposited.

There is a violet scum floating on the surface of the slightly turbid
liquid ; if the test-tube be shaken slightly, part of this sinks. Near
the apex of the cone, and on the floor of the small beads, masses of
the violet bacillus are seen.

Fic. 36.—Fluorescing bacillus growing in nutrient jelly. A
delicate green, slightly opalescent, film is seen on the surface of the
jelly. A pale grey growth is seen along the track of the needle. The
surrounding jelly gradually assumes a peculiar green fluorescent ap-
pearance, which alters very considerably according to the back-
ground and the lighting used. This resembles the bacillus of blue
milk in many respects, especially below the surface. The surface
growths, however, differ very materially.

F

82 SOLID CULTIVATION MEDIA.

danger of contamination from the atmosphere is with certainty
excluded. :

Nutrient jelly in test-tubes is specially adapted for the cultivation
of those organisms which can subsist on concentrated animal food
material, and which grow at ordinary temperatures. At blood-heat
the five per cent. jelly becomes liquid, and thus it is not adapted for
the cultivation of organisms, which require so high a temperature to

maintain their growth. Notwithstanding these limitations to its use,

Fic. 37.—Cultivation of 3. axthracts in nutrient jelly, showing a
liquefaction of the upper portion.

6. Dull yellow mass, composed of accumulated bacilli.
c. Bacilli growing along the tracks of the inoculating needle.

it is found to suit the requirements of a great number of species, and
is the more useful from its giving a characteristic reaction in the
presence of several of them. Organisms vary very much in the
reaction which they occasion in the jelly; some have the peculiarity

NUTRIENT JELLY IN TEST-TUBES. 83

of liquefying it; others produce nodules, delicate or thick cloud-
masses, spicular or branched growths; others have a distinct colour
reaction, by which they may at once be recognised (Figs. 35 and 36),
and the same holds true with regard to odours characteristic of certain
species. But this last feature avails but little in differentiating species

b

a

Fic. 38.—Cultivation in nutrient jelly of micrococcus found in
osteo-myelitis.
a. Liquefied upper layer.
4. Sediment from liquefied portion, forming an orange-yellow
mass of micrococci.
c. Growths of the micrococcus along the tracks of the needle.

generally, as a classification of odours on a scientific basis is still a de-
sideratum in many branches of biological research,

84 SOLID CULTIVATION MEDIA.

One of the best known species cultivated in gelatine is the Bact//us
anthracis (Figs. 37 and 43), which grows downwards in the track of the
inoculating wire in small round nodules of the size of grains of sand,
and of a dull pale yellow colour, and gradually liquefies the contents

Q

a

FIG. 39. FIG. 40.

Fic. 39.—Cultivation of pink yeast in nutrient jelly, showing the
brighter pink colour of the surface growth.

Fic. 40.—Cultivation of micrococci found in vaccine lymph.

a. Yellow growth on the surface.

6. Growth of small rounded white masses along the tracks of the
needle.

c. Cleft in the gelatine, from increased surface tension produced
by evaporation.

of the test-tube from above downwards, till in the course of six to
eight weeks the whole mass has become liquid. At the bottom of the

J

NUTRIENT JELLY IN TEST-TUBES. 85

liquid is a dense amorphous precipitate of a dull yellow colour, passing
in older specimens to an orange yellow hue, which consists of anthrax
bacilli, produced by the constant longitudinal growth and transverse
cleavage of the anthrax rods which were in the first place implanted.?

FIG. 41. Fic. 42.
Fic. 41.—Organism of the rabbit septiczemia (bacillus).

a. Well-marked surface growth.
Hollowing of surface of gelatine due to evaporation.
6, Growth along track of needle, also well marked.

Fic. 42.—Cultivation of micrococci found in vaccine lymph.
a. White growth on the surface. (Compare Fig. 40.)

Another organism which develops in a distinctive manner in pep-
tonised nutrient jelly is the pink yeast plant. It grows most luxuri-

1 Cp. Klein: Rep. to Med. Off. Local Government Board, 1882.

86 SOLID CULTIVATION MEDIA.

antly on the surface of the jelly, where it is found heaped up around
the point of inoculation, with a slightly elevated free surface of a
bright rose pink colour. It also grows downwards into the jelly, fol-
lowing the line of inoculation, and presenting the appearance of a
smooth sharp-pointed spike, of a dull grey pink colour. It does not
cause liquefaction of the jelly, and after developing to the extent de-
picted in Fig. 39, it ceases to grow, and passes into a stage of quies-
cence; but it retains the power of further propagation, if transplanted,.
for an indefinite period.

Amongst the pathogenetic organisms which flourish inthis medium
is that which gives rise to acute osteo-myelitis (see Fig. 38), first fully
described by Becker. It grows chiefly within the jelly, following the
track of the inoculating wire, along which a series of very fine nodules
is produced. These nodules have a faint yellow tinge, and are seen
to be perfectly smooth in their outlines when looked atjwith a magni-
fying glass. On the sixth and seventh day after inoculation, liquefac-
tion of the jelly commences, producing first a funnel-shaped depres-
sion full of liquefied jelly, and gradually extending, first to the
periphery of the test-tube, and then downwards, till the whole of its
contents become liquid. An amorphous deposit of a yellow colour is
found at the bottom of the test-tube, and the whole of the super-
jacent liquid is slightly tinged with the same colour. Re-inoculations
of culture material must be frequently repeated in the case of this
organism, as its vitality is lost soon after it has exhausted all the
available nourishment of one of the tubes of jelly, and it becomes
quite inert unless it is speedily supplied with fresh pabulum.

When an observer is acquainted with the typical form of growth
which a species exhibits in Koch’s jelly, he has no difficulty in de-
tecting the presence of impurities should they gain access to the con-
tents of the tube. Modifications are at once apparent in the type of
the growth which takes place, or an organism with quite distinctive
characteristics may be seen growing alongside that already cultivated;
an instance of this is supplied by Fig. 43, in which a cultivation of
Bacillus anthracis is figured in which this accident has occurred. The
upper part of the jelly has liquefied in the usual way, but at a lower
part of the test-tube is an opaque spherical mass, seen with a pocket
lens to consist of a central nodule, with delicate silky fibrils stretching

NUTRIENT JELLY [IN TEST-TUBES. 87

from it in all directions. This is at once recognised by ‘its method
of growth as a specimen of one of the cheese moulds (Penicillium

SUG Fea

FIG, 43. FIG. 44.
Fic. 43.—Impure cultivation of &. azthracts in nutrient jelly.

a. Upper portion of jelly, liquefied.
6. Sediment of 2. anthracis.
c. Nodule of Pentciltium glaucum.

Fic. 44.—-Growth of Bactertum termo and FPenictlia in nutrient
jelly.
a. Liquefied portion of jelly with opalescent green tinge, due to
presence of B. cermo.
6. Nodules of Pendced/ium growing in the track of the needle.

NV. B.—The jelly was inoculated with a non-sterilised needle.

glaucum), the spores of which are almost universally present in the
atmosphere ; and the spherical nodule in the jelly represents the

88 SOLID CULTIVATION MEDIA.

outcome of the growth of a single spore, that. has found its way into
the jelly, in all probability by falling upon the inoculating wire whilst
it was passing through the air to the sterile test-tube.

(B.) IN CApsULES, FOR TESTING AIR.

45, The condition of the atmosphere, in respect to the number of
germs in it, may be ascertained approximately by the employment of
a cultivation experiment with sterile jelly. A glass jar plugged with
cotton wool, and containing a shallow glass capsule (Fig. 45), is

Fic. 45.—Apparatus for determining relative purity of atmo-
spheres (qualitative).

a. Capsule containing sterilised nutrient jelly.

6, Brass lifter for removing capsule for examination.

om ee jar with sterilised plug, containing lifter and capsule ready
or use.

sterilised by heating to 170° C. dry heat for one hour, When it has
cooled, the glass capsule is charged with 10 c.c. of jelly, which has
been previously liquefied by heat, and withdrawn from one of the
stock-flasks by means of a sterilised (superheated) glass pipette.
This has to be done with great care—firstly, to avoid the risk of con-
taminating the contents of the stock-flask ; and, secondly, to prevent
the introduction of dust particles along with the jelly into the sterile
jar prepared for the experiment. The cotton wool plug of the
stock-flask is half withdrawn, and the point of the pipette is slowly
thrust through the remaining layers of the plug till it is free within

NUTRIENT JELLY—EXAMINATION OF AIR. 89

the cavity of the flask. Then the pipette is pushed down into the
liquefied gelatine, to c.c. of which are drawn up into the bulb by
suction. The upper end of the pipette is closed by the thumb, and the
pipette withdrawn. During the withdrawal of the pipette the cotton
wool plug is pressed firmly against it, to prevent ingress of dust par-
ticles ; and so soon as the point of the pipette is disengaged from the
cotton wool plug, that is replaced in its proper position.’ The same
manceuvres are carricd out in introducing the pipette into the sterile
jar; and when this is done, the liquid jelly is allowed to trickle
down into the capsule, and the pipette removed with the same pre-
cautions as before. We have thus obtained a thin layer of a very
susceptible substance, which may be exposed to any atmosphere ;
and the reaction that occurs can be easily observed through the walls
of the glass jar without in any way disturbing the capsule in which it
takes place. ‘Ihe jelly soon solidifies; and after being kept for a

Fic. 46.—From a photograph of glass capsule exposed in Saint
Giles’ Cathedral, Edinburgh (see description).

week in a warm room, to make sure that no adventitious growth will
take place in the capsule, it may be exposed to any given atmosphere
by the removal of the cotton wool plug. This exposure is of a definite

1 This method is open to the objection that it cannot be repeated safely more
than once or twice, as the risks of contamination are greatly increased by the
presence in the plug of even a small quantity of the nutrient material ; a better
plan is to remove the plugs from both beaker and flask, and carry out all the
manipulations under the protection of the carbolic spray.

go SOLID CULTIVATION MEDIA.

duration, and by comparing this with the number of foci of growth
which appear subsequently in the jelly, one can calculate ap-
proximately the extent to which germs are present in.the atmo-
sphere that is tested. The result of such an experiment is shown
in Fig. 46, which is taken from a photograph of a capsule
exposed to the atmosphere of Saint Giles’ Cathedral, Edinburgh,
for a period of fifteen minutes. During that period sixteen germs
fell into the capsule and produced the sixteen foci of growth, which
could be counted in the capsule eight days after its exposure. The
individual species of organisms present in an atmosphere may be
recognised by the naked eye appearances of the resulting growths,
or by putting the capsule upon the stage of the microscope, and
examining its contents with a low power. In the case cited the
organisms present were chiefly Aspergilli, Penicillia, and various micro-
cocci; Bacterium termo did not appear, but a colony of pink Zoruda was
at once recognised by its bright colour. In a subsequent series of
experiments performed in the hot rooms of the Turkish Baths in
Princes Street, Edinburgh, it was found that Fenicillium glaucum
greatly preponderated ; Bacterium termo was also largely present, but
the various forms of méerococci did not appear in the capsules. +
Another method, based on Cohn and Miflet’s plan, by which the
number of germs in any given bulk of atmosphere can be ascer-
tained, is that of Hesse. His apparatus (Fig. 47) consists of a
hollow glass cylinder, 18 inches in length and 2% in diameter.
over one of its ends is stretched a thin indiarubber sheeting, in
the centre of which is a small pore made with a fine needle.
The other end of the cylinder is occupied by a perforated india-
rubber stopper pierced by a piece of glass tubing. To the tubing
is attached a litre flask, which has another tube running from it to a
second litre flask, the interior of the two flasks being thus in com-
munication, The cylinder, indiarubber sheeting, and stopper are
purified by washing first with corrosive sublimate solution (1 in 1000),
and then with absolute alcohol. A quantity of liquefied nutrient jelly

‘ The success of these experiments depends on the facts, demonstrated by
Tyndall, that the germs present in any atmosphere constantly gravitate to dts lower
‘strata, and that by allowing subsidence to occur for a sufficient length of time, in a
closed space, a perfectly pure germless atmosphere is produced.

NUTRIENT JELLY—EXAMINATION OF AIR. gi

is now introduced into the cylindrical tube, sufficient to make a thin
layer along its floor. The tube leading from the cylinder is clamped,
and the pore in the indiarubber sheeting is covered with a cap of
sterilised cotton wool. The glass cylinder and its contents are then
steamed for thirty minutes on each of two consecutive days, to ensure
their sterility, the cylinder being kept level during this process. On

Fic. 47.—Hesse’s apparatus for determining relative purity of
atmospheres (qualitative and quantitative).
a. Hollow glass cylinder, with (4) perforated indiarubber
sheeting.
«. Exhausting apparatus, with siphon action.

cooling, the jelly sets in a thin layer on the lower aspect of the cylindri-
cal glass tube. In performing the experiment, the litre flasks, which are
filled with water, are put in communication with one another, and with

92 ; SOLID CULTIVATION MEDIA.

the tube proceeding from the cylinder. The clamp and cap of cotton
wool are removed, and the litre flask more distant from the cylinder
is allowed to empty itself by siphon action, drop by drop. Water is
thus drawn out of the nearer flask to supply the place of that removed
from the other, and air is drawn from the cylinder to take the place
of the water. Thus a current sets in from the outer air, through the
fine pore, into the cylinder, carrying with it representatives of the
germs in the atmosphere tested. A litre of outside air will have been
drawn slowly into the cylinder, by the time the litre flask is quite
empty, and then the experiment is stopped by clamping the tube and
replacing the cap over the pore in the indiarubber sheeting. The
germs, which enter by the pore, rapidly gravitate into the layer of
gelatine on the floor of the cylinder, and the number of foci of growth
which appear in the jelly a few days after exposure corresponds to the
number of germs per litre in the atmosphere tested.*

(C.) EXAMINATION OF WATER FOR MICRO-ORGANISMS.

46. This examination is now looked upon as a matter of considerable
importance, and in this country and in Germany various methods Rave
been suggested for making it as complete and as accurate as possible.

Where any sediment can be obtained from the water, after allowing
it to stand for some time, it is a comparatively easy matter to
examine with the microscope the organisms which are deposited
along with the solid particles. Without further amplification, how-
ever, such an examination is always far from satisfactory, and affords

‘ Dr. Maddox very ingeniously caused currents of air to impinge on a glass
slide smeared with pure glycerine. The glycerine was then examined microscopi-
cally. ‘With this glycerine inoculations may be made into various media, in
order that the organisms collected may be more thoroughly studied. Dr. Arthur
Ransome examined the breath of persons affected with phthisis for tubercle bacilli,
by collecting the breath in a glass globe, and condensing the aqueous vapour con-
tained in this breath, by surrounding the globe with a mixture of ice and salt.
The condensing vapour, ‘‘ it was found, carried down all the organic matter con-
tained in the breath,” and micro-organisms could be examined in this condensed
aqueous vapour.

In order to distinguish the tubercle bacilli, he mixed a small quantity of white
of egg with the water so obtained, and then treated the mixture as if it were or-
dinary sputum, staining by Heneage Gibbes’ method. This method may be
employed with advantage wherever the air contains a large percentage of moisture.

NUTRIENT JELLY--EXAMINATION OF WATER. 93

very incomplete information. Combined with this, the method of
staining a dried specimen with one of the aniline dyes, and then
preparing by His’s method (§ 32, p. 46) is extremely useful. In-
oculations with the water to be examined of one of the numerous
cultivation media, by means of a fine glass pipette or a platinum
wire, should always be made. In the case of spores of certain fungi,
bread paste ‘“‘ medicated” with nutrient fluids serves as a capital
medium ; whilst for bacteria, the transparent solid media answer best,
the growth of the micro-organisms being readily distinguished with
the naked eye, or by means of a very low magnifying power. The
methods now most commonly used are those based on Koch’s gela-
tine method’; the first devised by’ Koch himself, the second devised
by the late Dr. Angus Smith,

Koch mixes a definite quantity of water with a certain quantity of
warmed peptonised meat jelly. Whilst the mass is still fluid, it is
poured on to a level surface, on which the points of growth of the
micro-organisms are afterwards readily recognised.

The method of procedure is shortly as follows :—

On a tripod, which, by means of screws, may be raised or lowered
at any point as required, is placed a flat glass plate ruled into squares
by two series of lines at right angles to one another, and about half

Fic. 48.—Apparatus for determining relative purity of water.

a. Tripod, with adjustable feet.

bd. Large glass plate, on which spirit level rests.

c. Smaller plate, with inoculated gelatine in centre.
d@. Bell jar.

an inch apart. The centre of this is covered with a bell jar; care
having been taken to have both plate and bell jar thoroughly sterilised,

94 SOLID CULTIVATION MEDIA.

either by heat, or a solution of perchloride of mercury one-tenth per
cent. (see Fig. 48). At one corner of the plate is placed a small spirit
level, by the aid of which, and the screws on the feet, the frame is
adjusted until the plate is perfectly level.

A number of smaller glass plates (of such a size that they will
readily go under the bell jar) are then put into a sheet-iron box, with
an overlapping lid, and are exposed to a temperature of 170° C, for
at least one hour in the hot air chamber. They are then allowed to
cool, and, after the operator’s hands have been perfectly purified by
means of soap and water and perchloride of mercury solution, one of
the plates is taken out and rapidly transferred to the tripod on to the
larger plate and under the bell jar. A small quantity of the pepton-
ised meat jelly, about 5 c.c., in a sterilised test-tube is warmed in a
water bath until it is quite fluid, and then a couple of drops or more
of the water to be examined are carefully introduced by means of a
fine pipette. (The drops of water must all be of equal size.) The
sterile plug of wadding is rapidly returned to the mouth of the test-
tube. The whole mass, whilst still warm, is well shaken; then, raising
the bell jar carefully, the liquid is poured out on to the small glass plate,
and the bell jar is lowered. The measured squares on the larger plate
are easily seen through bell jar, upper plate, and layer of gelatine ; but,
for the sake of convenience, the upper plate may be ruled, especially
where a number of samples of water are examined on the same day,
and where in consequence the small plates are in turn removed to a
larger sterilised chamber or bell jar, where they may be examined
from time to time, at first merely for the number and naked eye char-
acteristics of the growths which make their appearance at more or less
regular intervals. Inoculations from these growing points may after-
wards be made into various nutritive media, bread paste, gelatine, agar-
agar, &c. ; careful microscopic examinations must also be conducted.

Dr. Angus Smith’s modification of Koch’s solid medium process
serves admirably for the demonstration of the number of micro-
organisms. He describes the method of working as follows :1—
“A solution was made containing five per cent. of solid gelatine.

1 Dr. R. Angus Smith ‘‘On the examination of Waters.” Second Report to
the Local Government Board, 1884.

NUTRIENT JELLY—EXAMINATION OF WATER. 95

This was prepared from the thin leaf, then, when dissolved, clarified
by filtration or by fresh albumen. This solution melts at about 27° C.,
or about 80° F.; 25 c.c. of this have been usually mixed with’ 25 c.c.
of the water to be examined, and kept for some minutes about the

Fic. 49. FIG. 50.
Fic. 49.—London waters, with 80 per cent. distilled water added
to gelatine sugar and sodium phosphate. Appearance presented in
the test-tube at the end of five days.

Fic, 50.—London waters added to gelatine sugar and sodium
phosphate. Appearance at the end of fivedays. (Copied from Angus
Smith.)

temperature indicated, but much smaller quantities are frequently

sufficient.”

The water is therefore added to the gelatine in large test-tubes
+
whilst it is still fluid ; after which, as it cools, the whole mass becomes

96 SOLID CULTIVATION MEDIA.

solid, and any organism developing remains with its progeny and its
products in one position, and “one sees at a glance the number exist-
ing in the water.”

In very impure water the organisms which are found in it in great
abundance appear to require the presence of oxygen for their growth,
and therefore liquefaction of the gelatine takes place only at the
surface, and the deeper parts may appear to contain fewer active
organisms than some water that is comparatively pure, in which “the
whole water becomes filled with perfectly formed and transparent
spheres, forming very beautiful objects. At the bottom of the spheres
is a little white line; sometimes this becomes rather marked, and if
it is too heavy, it sinks below the circumference, and gives an appear-
ance of a balloon with a parachute.”

“Tf a pipette is put into these spheres, and suction applied, it will
be found that they are full of liquid, whilst the gelatine around is
solid. The deposit below contains a great mass of active and
inactive bacteria.”

‘“‘ There is another phenomenon appearing in some of them, viz.—
a number of very minute white dots, which increase to a size of a
pin-head,” but which do not liquefy the gelatine’ ‘These may be
scattered in countless numbers through the water, and seem to
indicate the number of points of vitality in the water.”

Dr. Smith considers that gelatine alone gives sufficiently good
results, but that phosphate of soda or sugar, or both, may be added
to the gelatine, in which cases the changes go on more rapidly, even
too rapidly for accurate observation. This difficulty, however, is easily
overcome by taking a smaller quantity of water, so that the spherules
may be less numerous.

The great advantage that this process has over the flat glass plate
method is, that observations may be carried on in the same specimen
for a very considerable period, the large mass of gelatine affording
ample space for extension in all directions, in addition to which there
is not any great tendency to dry, as there is in the case of the thin
film of gelatine on the glass plate. On the other hand, it is impos-
sible to get secondary inoculations on to other media by Dr. Smith’s
method, though he suggests that part of the surface growth may be
diluted with distilled water and added to a fresh quantity of gelatine.

AGAR-AGAR MIXTURE. 97

Dr. Angus Smith has also suggested an excellent method “ of
measuring the amount of organic life existing in the water by means
which may be called purely chemical.” He measures their activity
by their power of evolving hydrogen during the decomposition of
sugar, which they bring about. He proceeds as follows :—‘‘ Tubes
seven and a quarter inches long and three-quarter inch diameter were
filled with the water to be examined, to which one per cent. grape
sugar was added. These were inverted, sealed at the bottom with
mercury, and allowed to stand. In every case there was a control ex-
periment made by using the purest distilled water, to which the same
amount of sugar was added.” After five days gases commenced to
collect, and, in most specimens of water examined, gas was eliminated.
He then washed the gas with caustic potash, and, by means of this
and pyrogallic acid, found that carbonic acid was present in small
quantities only, and that oxygen was absent. The gas was fired with
oxygen, and found to be composed almost entirely of hydrogen and
nitrogen, and this evolution of hydrogen by the micro-organisms
acting on organic matter is made the measure of their vital activity.

(D.) CuLtTiIvaTION IN STERILE AGAR-AGAR MIXTURE.

47, In consequence of the fact already mentioned, that the five per
cent. gelatine solution liquefies if its temperature be slightly raised, a
more resisting substance has been introduced by Maddox and Koch,
which is equal to peptonised jelly in its nutritive qualities and in its
transparency, and which will remain solid until a very high temperature
(80° C.) is reached. Agar-agar consists of the dried sliced stem of a
Jucus, and is largely used in culinary science under the name of Japan
isinglass. If this substance be added in the proportion of one per cent.
to the beef-peptone broth used in preparing peptonised jelly, as already
described (§ 43, p. 72), and the gelatine be omitted from the mixture,
a very nourishing solid medium is produced. Its preparation and
sterilisation are completed in precisely the same manner as was
described in the case of the jelly, and it is used in the same ways as
that substance, over which it has the great advantage in certain cases of
being capable of constant incubation, even at high temperatures, with-
out losing its solidity.

G

98 SOLID CULTIVATION MEDIA.

(4.) CULTIVATION ON STERILISED SOLIDIFIED BLOOD SERUM.

48. Another solid and transparent cultivating medium is supplied
by the serum which is separated from blood after it has clotted. The
blood of any animal will supply this,
but it is found that that from the calf
is most abundant, and has the greatest
degree of translucency. Having been
sterilised by a long process of inter-
rupted heating, it is solidified by care-
fully inspissating it at a high tempera-
ture. To obviate as far as possible the
risks of contamination from without,
the blood is carefully collected in pre-
pared jars at the period of slaughter-
ing. Tall stoppered glass jars (see
Fig. 51) are prepared for its reception,
by being thoroughly cleansed, first
with a one per cent. solution - of

Fic. 51.—Jar for collecting mercuric chloride, and then with
blood. absolute alcohol. The stopper is

smeared thoroughly with vaseline containing corrosive sublimate,
to prevent its becoming fixed, and to exclude atmospheric dust
from the jar and its contents. Jars thus prepared are allowed
to stand in an ice-press for several hours before use; and,
during the process of slaughtering, the blood is allowed to flow
directly from the animal’s neck into a jar, unstoppered for the
moment for this purpose. The first gush of blood is rejected, to
avoid impurities which it ‘might acquire in passing through the
wound, When the jar is filled to within two inches of the top, it is
re-stoppered and placed at rest in an ice-press or cool place for
twenty-four hours.! At the end of that time, coagulation and the sub-

1 During the first few hours, a small quantity of thin and watery but deeply

_ stained fluid accumulates at the surface of the coagulated mass. This should be

carefully removed with a sterilised pipette, or it may discolour the serum which

collects around the contracting clot, and interfere somewhat with the transparency
of the fluid, and still more with the solidified serum.

STERILISED BLOOD SERUM. 99

sequent contraction of the blood-clot'are complete, and a mass of.
fibrin containing all the red blood corpuscles is found floating in a
quantity of clear limpid serum, which has been extruded on the con-
traction of the coagulum. This clear serum must now be transferred
to sterile test-tubes, in each of which must be placed a quantity
suitable for a single cultivation experiment. This is effected by
means of a glass pipette. The pipette and the test-tubes, with their
cotton wool plugs, are previously sterilised by heating to 170° C. for
one hour in a hot air chamber. The jar containing the serum is
then unstoppered, the pipette introduced into the serum, care being
taken not to disturb the floating blood-clot, and 10 c.c. of the clear
liquid is removed, by drawing it into the bulb of the pipette by

een |

gee

Fic. 52.—‘*Slow steriliser” for sterilising blood serum by
Tyndall’s method, as adopted by Koch. For description see Fig. 53.

suction. Thence it is allowed to trickle down into the lower part of
one of the sterile test-tubes, which is unplugged to permit of this,

|

100 SOLID CULTIVATION MEDIA.

and the plug is replaced immediately afterwards. This process is
repeated till a sufficient number of tubes are prepared ; and the test-
tubes thus charged with serum are at once placed in the “slow
steriliser” (see Fig. §2), the temperature of which is raised to
57°C. At this temperature, which must on no account be more
than very slightly exceeded, the apparatus is maintained for six hours
on the first day of the sterilising process. On each of the five
succeeding days the apparatus must again be raised to the same
temperature, and maintained there for four hours each day. The

Fic, 53.—Slow steriliser for blood serum.

a. Main chamber with water jacket.

6, Central tube communicating with water in jacket.

c. Lid with diverticulum, heated by Bunsen burner, @.
Thermometers pass into central chamber, lid, and water-jacket.

temperature is not allowed to mount higher, lest premature coagula-
tion should occur in the serum, and its transparency should thus be

STERILISED BLOOD SERUM. IOL

lost. At the end of this process the serum is sterile, but still liquid.
In order to solidify it, without at the same time destroying its clear-
ness and transparency, the tubes containing it are laid on their sides

Fic. 54.—Serum inspissator or thermostat, with two test-tubes in
position. One-half of glass lid and felt cover are not shown in
drawing. The apparatus consists of a double-walled box, covered
with felt, and heated from below ; the temperature being maintained
by warm water occupying the interspace between the two walls.

on the sloping floor of a thermostat (see Fig. 54), which is so tilted
that the plane of the surface of the serum cuts that of the lumen of
the test-tube obliquely, and the surface of the serum is thus largely
increased, and offers a wider area for the cultivation of micro-
organisms. This is of the greater importance, from the fact that
in the case of most organisms which can be advantageously culti-
vated in this medium it is found that growth only occurs on the free
surface of the serum, and not at all in its deeper layers:

The next part of the process requires the most careful and con-
stant attention of the operator. It consists in raising the temperature
in the thermostat to from 68° to 80° C., which causes a more or less
rapid solidification of the serum. The serum first becomes solid
merely, retaining its transparency, but if the process be allowed to

.102 SOLID CULTIVATION MEDIA.

pass in the least beyond this stage, the transparency is replaced by a
dull opacity that becomes denser the longer the serum is exposed to
the increased heat. It is necessary, therefore, to remove the test-
tubes from the thermostat the moment their contents have become
solid, and before the opacity has commenced to appear. If this
stage is passed, the solid serum is still a useful nutrient soil, but
it has lost that perfect translucency which constitutes its special
value, inasmnch as it allows of the exact observation and delineation
of the special methods of growth exhibited by special organisms.
The amount of heat requisite to inspissate the serum varies in different
cases, and chiefly in relation to the various sources from which it is
obtained. Thus solidification takes place at a lower temperature
in serum from the blood of sheep, oxen, and pigs, and in human
pleuritic and peritonitic fluids, than it does in calf-blood serum, or in
the fluid from hydrocele. As it becomes solid, a few drops of water
are evaporated from the serum and condensed inthe tube. In addition
to the above-named sources of supply may be named the contents of
blisters, and of any of the serous sacs, and the vitreous humour of
the calf. Before preparing serum from any of the sources mentioned
in large quantities, it is advisable to ascertain the amount of albumen
present, by heating a sample of the liquid in a test-tube over the
flame of a Bunsen burner. If the serum becomes solid, it will
answer well for cultivation purposes, and can be prepared as already
described. If only a flocculent precipitate is thrown down, it cannot
be prepared thus with advantage, as it will refuse to solidify in the
thermostat. Such serum, however, can be used in combination with
gelatine as a useful culture medium.?

Summary of Process for preparing Sterilised Blood Serum.

First Day.—-Collect blood in sterile jars, and allow to stand for
twenty-four hours.

1 Koch has largely employed, and highly recommends, a sero-gelatine solution,
consisting of limpid blood serum, to which five per cent. of its bulk of gelatine is
added, and which must be sterilised by the ‘‘slow process” above described. It is
employed exactly as is the peptonised jelly. Care must be taken that it is not on
any occasion heated above 60° C., when coagulation and opacity would be likely

»toensue. (Koch, Mittheilungen a. d. k. Gesundhettsamte, Bd. i., p. 27.)

INOCULATION OF BLOOD SERUM. 103

Second Day.—Remove serum with sterile pipette into sterile test-

tubes.
In slow steriliser at 57° C. for six hours.
Third Day. /
Fourth ,,
Fifth ,, ‘\ Inslow steriliser at 57° C. for four hours.
Sisth ,,
Seventh ,,

Eighth Day.—In thermostat 68° to 80° C., till solid.

MerHop oF INOCULATION.

49. To inoculate one of the sterile tubes of serum, a mounted pla-
tinum wire of medium thickness is chosen, with sufficient rigidity to
enable it-to produce a furrow on the surface of the tough serum. The
tip of the wire is bent at a right angle (see Fig. 21), and upon it, after it
has been sterilised at a white heat, is placed an infinitesimal quantity
of the seed material. The test-tube is held inverted, to prevent the
entrance of atmospheric impurities ; the cotton wool plug is then re-
moved, and held between two of the fingers, with its lower part point-
ing downwards (Fig. 34), and the loaded platinum wire is now intro-
duced into the test-tube. The bent point of the wire is pressed down
upon the surface of the solid serum, and longitudinal furrows are made
by drawing the wire in a series of parallel lines from the lower extremity
towards the mouth of the test-tube, and in this way the seed material
is implanted in linear tracts, along which the characteristic features of
the resulting growth may be observed. The wire is now withdrawn,
and the cotton wool plug replaced in the mouth of the tube. The
wire is immediately heated to a white heat, to obviate the risks of
disseminating the seed material, which is often of a dangerous
character, amongst neighbouring objects.

The test-tubes may be placed in an incubator, and kept at blood-
heat, if this be desirable; and the serum so used has this advantage
over peptonised beef jelly, that it retains its solidity at all tempera-
tures. :

Inspissated blood serum prepared in this way in sterile test-tubes
has been chiefly employed in the cultivation of some organisms which

104 SOLID CULTIVATION MEDIA.

do not flourish so well in peptonised jelly as in this medium, and
notably for the culture of the tubercle bacillus.

Fic. 55.—Tubercle bacillus
cultivated upon solid serum in
test-tube, glass capsule (after
Koch).

Fic. 56.—Tubercle bacillus upon solid
serum.

At an even summer temperature the
tubercle bacillus flourishes admirably in
this soil, and presents a quite character-
istic appearance. It grows in the form
of a delicate white pellicle (see Fig. 55),
which has a flaky, almost fluffy, appear-
ance, and a dull granular surface, which
forms a marked contrast to that of the
solid serum, which is smooth and shin-_
ing. This pellicle covers the whole of the
surface of the serum in course of time,
and forms a thin membrane over the
few drops of moisture which occupy

BLOOD SERUM—TUBERCLE BACILLUS. 105

the lower part of the test-tube. It in no way modifies the clearness
of the liquid, nor will it mingle with it, but is torn up and washed
away in flakes, should the water be allowed to trickle over the surface
of the serum. ‘The same organism can be advantageously cultivated
in sterile capsules of solidified serum (see Fig. 56), when it presents
similar features, which can here be studied to even greater advantage
than when it is grown in test-tubes.

CHAPTER. fY.

LIQUID CULTIVATING MEDIA.

50. In addition to the media described in the preceding chapter,
there is a long series of fluid media used in the cultivation of micro-
organisms. They are of two main types—firstly, those obtained by
infusing animal or vegetable substance in water ; and, secondly, those
produced by the artificial commingling of the chemical elements
which are present in the bodies of micro-organisms, and which are
hence necessary constituents of their food. In some of the latter
the quantities of the different constituents have been graduated with
exquisite precision to the requirements of the organisms that it is
desired to cultivate; whilst in the former, where fully elaborated
natural products are employed, in which doubtless a similar exacti-
tude of molecular relations exists, the requisite food material may be
obtained by a less complex synthetical process.

As compared with solid media, three points must be noticed
in relation to the growth of micro-organisms in fluids. In fluid
media, organisms grow more rapidly than in solid. In the former,
however, they do not, as a rule, exhibit such distinctive specific
features as in the latter; but in fluid media there is an opportunity
of gauging exactly the chemical requirements and relations of micro-
organisms, which does not exist in the case of solids. For the study,
then, of the physiological peculiarities of any organism, one would
choose a fluid nutrient material ; whilst for that of its morphological
relations, solid media would be much better adapted.

ANIMAL INFUSIONS.

51. Fresh meat (beef, pork, veal, chicken, &c.), free from fat, and,
as far as possible, from fibrous textures, is finely minced and extracted
with cold distilled water for twenty-four hours in a cool place, a litre

ANIMAL INFUSIONS. 107

of water being added to a pound of the meat. From time to time
during this process the whole should be well stirred. It is
then filtered through a piece of fine linen cloth, and the pulpy mass
is subjected to pressure in the screw press (see Fig. 31), to extract as
much fluid as possible from it. The broth thus obtained is usually
distinctly acid (see § 43, p. 73), and must be neutralised by the
addition of a saturated solution of carbonate of soda, drop by drop,
until the broth becomes quite neutral in its reaction.

It is now received into a glass flask (one litre), and is placed in the
steam steriliser at 100° C., and steamed (not boiled) for thirty
minutes. A fine precipitate is found to occupy the lower layers of
the flask after this process. This is got rid of by filtering the broth
through a filter which has immediately previously been washed
thoroughly with boiled distilled water, and the clear filtrate is re-
ceived into stock flasks (quarter litre), which, with their plugs, have
been previously sterilised by superheating (see § 43, p. 75). The
stock - flasks thus charged are steamed for thirty minutes in the
steam steriliser at 100° C. on each of two consecutive days, standing
in a cool place in the intervals of steaming. The stock-flasks are
incubated for four days at 32° C., and if no reaction occur, they may
be kept as a reservoir of sterile material for future use in cultivation.

To carry on cultivations with the sterile broth thus prepared, it is
convenient to have it divided into small quantities. For this purpose
a number of one ounce Bohemian flasks are prepared, supplied with
‘ cotton wool plugs, and sterilised by superheating in the hot air
chamber (Fig. 33); and 10 cc. of the sterile broth is transferred to
each flask by the use of a superheated glass pipette, as described
under ‘nutrient jelly” (§ 44, p. 78). This should either be carried
out under the carbolic spray (footnote, p. 78), or, when charged,
the small flasks should be steamed at roo” C. on two successive
days, for fifteen minutes each day.

Inoculations are carried out by means of a platinum wire as already
described, with the exception that here the flasks cannot be inverted
to avoid atmospheric contamination, and in this case it is best to
inoculate with seed material, either under the spray, or under the pro-
tection of a canopy of cotton cloth soaked in a one per cent. solution
of perchloride of mercury. Any of these infusions may be rendered

108 LIQUID CULTIVATING MEDIA.

more suitable for the growth of organisms, by the addition of one per
cent. of albumen peptone before the initial neutralisation and filtering
are carried out.
BucHNErR’s FLuip.
52. Amongst the nutrient animal infusions, that recommended by
Buchner will be found of great value. It consists of—

Liebig’s meat extract, : : ; 10 parts.
Albumen peptone, . ; : : 8 4
Distilled water, : . 1000 ,,

Before it is used it must be sheiilined ae incubated under observa-
tion for a week, as has been already described.

A similar peptonised liquid can be even more easily procured by
using Darby’s fluid meat (peptonised) in a half per cent. solution :—
Darby’s fluid meat, . : F : 5 parts.

Distilled water, : . I000 ,,
Sterilise by steaming, and ssiduibate under cbiewenon before use.

URINE.

58. Urine passed into sterile flasks with antiseptic precautions (use
of spray, careful purification of meatus) does not become alkaline, as it
would do if exposed under ordinary conditions to the air. This is
equivalent to stating that it remains sterile; and it forms, without
further preparation, an admirable soil for several kinds of fungi
(moulds) ; but from its slightly acid reaction, it is not, in the first
place, so well adapted to the growth of the cleft fungi (bacteria).
Should, however, one of the latter (Mtcrococcus uree, Cohn) once
establish itself in the urine, it gives rise to the ammoniacal fermenta-
tion, and prepares the way for the growth of its congeners by render-
ing the liquid alkaline ; whilst the moulds, overpowered by the rapid
growth of cleft fungi, soon lose their vitality, and are disintegrated.
If urine cannot be collected with the precautions named, it should
be placed in sterile flasks, and treated as any of the animal infusions
above described, before it is used for experiments.

MILK.

54. If collected in sterile flasks with careful aseptic precautions
(pure air, or spray, and careful purification of teats 7) milk will remain

1 “ Antiseptic Surgery,” Watson Cheyne, pp. 38-39, 1881.

MILK—CHEESE INFUSION. 109

quite sterile, and may be used as a culture medium for a great
number of organised species (torule, bacilli, micrococci). As obtained
from ordinary sources, milk must be thoroughly sterilised before use.
Its sterilisation is more than usually difficult, from its physical
character as a bad conductor of heat, and from the fact that it is
early contaminated with germinal matter in the usual methods of its
storage and transmission. This germinal matter consists, amongst
other elements, of the dried spores of Bacterium lactis (Lister) and
Bacillus butyris (Pasteur, Cohn), which, when brought into contact
with fresh milk under suitable conditions of temperature, &c., rapidly
take on vegetative activity, and render it difficult of subsequent
sterilisation. The method of destroying this activity, and rendering
the milk sterile, is by steaming that liquid repeatedly for thirty
minutes at a time, at intervals of twenty-four hours, for five or six
days. If it be only twice steamed, as prescribed for other animal
liquids, B. Jactis is usually excluded, but after an interval it is often
found that the cream layer has become rancid, owing to the develop-
ment of B. dutyris, although the milk beneath that layer may remain
quite pure. When thoroughly sterilised, milk should be incubated
at 32° C. under observation for a week, and if it remain unaltered, it
may then be used as a culture medium.

BLoop SERUM.

55. Limpid serum is obtained from the various sources (blood
from slaughter-houses, hydroceles, pleuritic and peritonitic effusions,
blisters, &c.) already mentioned when treating of the solid media
(see § 48, p. 102). It is sterilised by the slow process as previously
described, and it can be used as a culture medium in the various
ways enumerated under “animal infusions.”

CHEESE INFUSION.

56. Infusions which contain cheese as one of their constituents
must be sterilised with the greatest circumspection, and afterwards sub-
jected to the test of prolonged incubation. This is rendered necessary
by the great resistance which cheese offers to the sterilising process.
The quality of impermeability by heat,* which it possesses in common
with milk, accounts for this difficulty in effecting its sterilisation.

1 Tyndall, Proc. Roy. Soc., 1877, vol. 26, p. 228.

Ilo LIQUID CULTIVATING MEDIA.

VEGETABLE INFUSIONS.

57, Watery infusions of hay, turnip, tobacco, &c., which have been
largely used in the cultivation of many forms of micro-organisms, are
prepared by macerating the several vegetable substances employed
in distilled water for eight hours, and then raising the temperature
gradually to the boiling point. The infusions are then filtered,
transferred to sterile flasks (previously superheated), and sterilised by
the method already described under “Animal Infusions” (§ 51, p. 107).
They may be made of varying degrees of concentration, according to
the requirements of various organisms, and the luxuriance of growth
that is wished for.

Sterile grape juice is obtained by preparing the filtered juice of
ripe grapes in the same manner. It affords special facilities for the
growth of Zorude and the Mycoderma aceti.

ARTIFICIAL SOLUTIONS.
Raulin’s Fluid.
58. A mineral solution, made up of elements the exact relative
proportions of which were determined by the results of chemical

analysis of the tissues of the group of micro-fungi (Aspergil/i), for the
cultivation of which it was devised. It consists of—

Distilled water, ‘ ; : . 1500 parts.
Cane sugar, . : , : 2 FOI 4,
Tartaric acid, : ‘ : 40 «CW;
Ammonium nitrate, . 7 ‘ ' 410 45
Ammonium phosphate, d : o6
Potassium carbonate, ‘ ‘ ; 06 (,
Magnesium carbonate, : : : 4 4
Ammonium sulphate, F 5 : 0°25 4,
Zinc sulphate, : : : : OO},
Ferrous sulphate, . 3 ‘ : 0°07 4,
Potassium sulphate, . ; F ‘ 0'O7 4,

The employment of this solution has been productive of a great
increase of knowledge as to the intricate chemical relations and food
requirements of the group of the moulds. It may be used without

PASTEUR’S, COHN’S, MIQUEL’S FLUIDS. 111

modification for their cultivation ; and various slight alterations in its
composition render it of great value in the culture of several of the
other groups of micro-organisms.

Pasteur’s Fluid.
59. Pasteur’s fluid consists of—
Distilled water, ‘ . . 1000'0 parts.
Pure cane sugar, . . Ioo'o ,,
Ammonium tartrate, : - too 4,
Ash of yeast, : : é o'75 «,,

This formula has a special interest attaching to it, as it is that of
the first synthetically prepared medium employed in the cultivation
of micro-organisms.

Cohn’s Fluid (as most recently modified.)

60. This consists of—

Distilled water, ; j + 200 parts.

Tartrate of ammonium, d do $20.45

Phosphate of potassium, : . 20 4,

Sulphate of magnesium, ee camer

Tribasic phosphate of lime, . o “OM. sy
Miquel’s Fluid.

61. Whilst disparaging the use of Liebig’s extract of meat as a
nourishing medium, Miquel? recommends an infusion prepared
according to the following formula :—

Boil 1 kilogramme of lean beef in 4 litres of distilled water, for
five hours.
Strain and neutralise with caustic soda solution. Add 4o gram-
mes of common salt (10 gr. per litre).
This infusion should be sterilised by discontinuous steaming in stock-
flasks of convenient size, and incubated thoroughly before using it as
a cultivating medium.

1 “Les organisms vivants de l’atmosphere,” p. 152.
g P » P

112 LIQUID CULTIVATING MEDIA.

LISTER’S FLASK. «

62. A convenient method of storage for sterile liquids consists in
making use of Lister’s flasks (Fig. 57). They consist of spherical

Fic, 57.—Lister’s Flask.
Bohemian glass flasks with two necks—a vertical and a lateral one ;
the former is straight, and is plugged in the usual way with sterile
cotton wool (§ 41, p. 64); the latter consists of a bent tube, piercing
the side of the flask, and ending with a constricted neck in a tapering
nozzle. This lateral entrance is protected by a mass of sterile cotton
wool enclosed in a piece of gauze, and secured to the constricted
neck of the tube by a piece of twine or an elastic ring. These flasks,
which contain about half a litre each, are filled only so full as to
avoid the risk of their contents reaching either of the plugs during the
process of ebullition, in which case the clearness of the liquid might
be lost by the abstraction of dust or fibrils from the cotton wool of
which the plugs are made. When it has been charged with a quantity
of stock liquid, the Lister’s flask is sterilised by subjecting it to
heat, that of the steam steriliser (Fig. 14) being preferred, from its
preventing evaporation during the sterilising process. The stock
liquid can then be kept for any length of time without becoming
contaminated. When it is desired to abstract some of the contents
of the flask, the sterile pad is removed from the bent lateral neck, and
as much liquid as is required is allowed to flow from the lateral

LISTERS FLASK—AITKEN'S TEST-TUBE. 113

aperture by tilting the flask to one side. On restoring the flask to its
upright position, it is found that though the liquid at once gravitates
back from the lateral bent tube, yet there is no regurgitation of the
mote-bearing air from without, which would almost inevitably con-
taminate the sterile liquid. This is prevented by a drop of liquid
that occupies the extreme end of the lateral tube, which it completely
occludes, and thus prevents the air from passing in. After a quantity
of the liquid has been withdrawn, a fresh sterile pad is placed over
the mouth of the lateral tube, and fastened in that position as above
described, and the residue of the stock liquid can be maintained
sterile for an indefinite period.

AITKEN’s TrEst-TUBE.

63. This supplies a very convenient means of carrying on pure cul-
tivations in liquid media. The tube
(Fig. 58) has a lateral diverticulum
in the form of a narrow glass tube,
which tapers and ends in a fine im-
pervious point. The test-tube is
plugged with cotton wool, and
sterilised by superheating. It is
then charged with ro c.c. of sterile
culture fluid, and incubated for four
or five days. If its contents remain
unaltered, it may be inoculated for
a cultivation experiment. To do
this the seed material is first pre-
pared on the tip ofa sterile platinum t
wire. The end of the lateral tube is {
then snipped off with a pair of sterile |
(superheated) pliers, and the wire,
introduced carefully along the lateral i
tube, deposits the seed material » 3
upon the inner wall of the test-tube,
opposite to the point whence the i
diverticulum springs. The wire is we
then withdrawn, and the end of the :

lateral tube sealed by fusing it in Fic. 58.—Aitken’s Test-Tube.
H

114 LIQUID CULTIVATING MEDIA.

the flame of a Bunsen burner. The test-tube is now tilted so that
its liquid contents come in contact with the seed material deposited:
on its wall, and the inoculation is thus ingeniously provided for, with
absolutely no fear of contamination. There is no tendency for germs
to be wafted in from the outside atmosphere during the inoculation,
as the sieve-like action of the cotton wool plug provides for the
atmospheric pressure being equal within and without the test-tube.

STERNBERG’S BULB.

64. Sternberg has invented another method of making pure cultiva-
tions in liquid media. It consists in the use of a very small glass
bulb with a tube opening into it. The bulb (see Fig. 59) is charged

Fic. 59.—Sternberg’s Bulb.

by first heating it ; the tip of the tube is then broken off, and the end
of the tube immersed in the culture liquid. As the bulb cools the
liquid is drawn up into it, and usually fills about one-third of its cavity.
The tube is now sealed up again in the flame of a Bunsen burner, and
several bulbs thus charged are sterilised by intermittent heat in a water
or sand bath. They are then incubated for several days, and if they
then show no signs of contamination, they may be used in carrying on
cultures. In inoculating them the bulb is heated, the tip of the tube
broken off, and its end immersed in the material that it is desired to
cultivate. A trace of this at once enters the tube, and becomes
mingled with the liquid in the bulb. The tube is again carefully

INCUBATION OF CULTURE MEDIA. 115

sealed. In this way separate cultures of isolated organisms are ob-
tained, and their characteristics may be observed with great ease in
this form of cultivation.

INCUBATION.

65. Incubation of culture media which have been inoculated should
be, as far as possible, carried on at even temperatures. To maintain
any temperature equally for a length of time, one or other form of care-
fully constructed incubator is absolutely necessary. That depicted in
Fig. 60 is a convenient form, from its having double glass sides,

Fic. 60.—Incubator, with regulator (2) in air chamber.

which allow of the contents being from time to time examined, without
removing them from the warmer atmosphere within the apparatus. The
apparatus is double-walled, and the interspace between the walls is
occupied by a layer of water. There is, of course, a layer of air be-
tween the double glass walls. The heating is carried on by a small
Bunsen burner in connection with a gas regulator, which controls
the amount of gas supplied to it. The tube of the regulator lies in
the water, within the hollow walls of the incubator, or in the air
chamber, and is so constructed that when the temperature of the

116 LIQUID CULTIVATING MEDIA.

water or air rises high, a column of mercury in the regulator rises also
to such an extent as to cut off nearly all the gas supply which
passes through the regulator to the burner. In this way the flame
is reduced, and the temperature of the water begins to fall; as it
does so, the column of mercury falls, and more gas is permitted to
pass. By these two processes of mutual accommodation it is usually
easy to maintain a very equable temperature in the incubator. To
cultivate many species of organisms successfully it is necessary to
incubate the media in which they are. Generally speaking, a tem-
perature of from 30° to 36° C. is the most advantageous for inducing.
a rapid development of the cultivated organisms.

CHAPTER. ¥.

SEPARATION OF MICRO-ORGANISMS FROM THE
TISSUES.

66. In order to carry out pure cultivations, as described in the pre-
ceding chapters, it is essential to be able to separate the seed material
which it is desired to cultivate, and inoculate it in suitable media
uncontaminated by foreign elements. Some differences of method
must be noticed in this respect, according as the tissues supposed
to contain organisms are living or dead.

1.—FRom LiviINnG TISSUES.

67. (a.) Blood.—In the case of the human subject this is usually
taken from the finger or from the ear. In either case the skin is first
cleansed with warm water and soap, then purified with a one per cent.
solution of perchloride of mercury, and lastly washed with absolute
alcohol. In the case of the finger, the venous return is hindered by
the application of an elastic band, and vascular engorgement of the
part ensues. The sterile surface is then pricked with a needle that
has previously lain for several minutes in absolute alcohol, and the
drop of blood which exudes is collected on the looped end of a sterile
platinum wire, and can be at once used for inoculation as already
described. In animals the same method may be employed, first
shaving the part to be put into requisition; it is more usual, how-,
ever, to kill the animal, and obtain blood before coagulation has set
in, as described in the next section.

(4.) Solid Tissues.—Heére the best method is to make use of Duch-
enne’s needle, which has been previously thoroughly sterilised by super-
heating (see § 68, p. 118). The skin surface through which it is intro-
duced is sterilised beforehand, as already described (vide supra), and
the minute portion of tissue thus obtained is at once transferred to
the tip of a sterile platinum wire, inoculated into a suitable nutrient
medium, and, if need be, incubated.

118 SEPARATION OF MICRO-ORGANISMS FROM TISSUES.

The same method may be used in the case of animals, but it is
usually better to kill them, and obtain the seed material as described
under “dead tissues.”

(c.) Discharges.—This comprehends contents of abscesses, and the
excretions from glands (eg., kidney) in which living organisms
capable of cultivation may be present. An abscess should be opened
with antiseptic precautions (spray, skin purified, &c.), and a drop of
pus as it emerges collected on the end of a looped platinum wire, and
at once plunged into some sterile‘nutrient medium. Urine should
be collected with similar precautions in a sterile flask, and after cool-
ing, some of the deposit drawn into a newly made glass pipette, and
transferred to some nutrient medium. Usually the organisms thrown
off in the urine are dead. They can be recognised microscopically,
but rarely cultivated. An ingenious method of separating the Baci-
Zus lepre from the living tissues has already been described (see foot-
note, p. 38).

2.—From Deap TISSUES.

68. Unless taken immediately after death, dead tissues are in general
useless for employment as seed material. If they can be secured at
once, however, pure cultivations of the micro-organisms which they
contain may be obtained with ease. In the case both of man and
animals a certain amount of dissection must be carried out with
aseptic precautions to obtain this result. In making this dissection
only sterile instruments must be employed. All the instruments
necessary (several knives, scissors, forceps, Pravaz’ syringes, &c.) are
thoroughly cleansed, and wrapped in sheets of cotton wool. They
are then placed in the hot air steriliser for an hour at 170° C.,?
not heated in the flame, as has been suggested, and which is a most
extravagant method, as it destroys the temper of steel completely.
They are wrapped in cotton wool, to prevent access of atmospheric
germs to the sterile instruments, when the outside air regurgitates
into the hot air chamber on its beginning to cool. They are only
unwrapped from their cotton wool protection immediately before use.

1 The knives must have bone handles, as, if made of wood, they become in-
cinerated.

FROM DEAD TISSUES. 119

(a.) Blood.—In the human subject this should be taken as soon
after death as possible, by sterilising a portion of the skin, as already
described, and introducing the sterile needle of a Pravaz’ syringe
into a vein from which the blood is withdrawn. This blood can be
at once inoculated into various media, and the cultivation of its con-
tained organisms at once proceeded with. In animals the peri-
cardium is laid open with a sterile knife and forceps, and the left
ventricle opened with sterile scissors; and then a sterile platinum
wire is introduced into its cavity; and some of the blood removed for
inoculation.

(6.) Téssues.—In the human subject either a dissection is made
with sterile instruments immediately after death, or a harpoon is em-
ployed, as described under living tissues, and a small portion of tissue
obtained in either of these ways is planted in a nutrient soil, as already
detailed. In animals small portions of tissue are separated by dissec-
tion, removed with a sterile platinum wire, and forthwith implanted
in a nutrient soil.

In the case of the tubercle bacillus a pure cultivation was first ob-
tained by pounding down a caseous bronchial gland in boiled dis-
tilled water, and planting the extract thus obtained in blood serum.?
(¢.) Discharges.—It is difficult to obtain pure cultivations of micro-
organisms from discharges collected after death, as the post mortem
contaminants are usually both numerous and varied. If the attempt
be made, some of the discharge should be diluted with boiled dis-
tilled water, and then allowed to trickle in a thin layer over the sur-
face of solid nutrient media (potatoes, gelatine), and the various foci
of growth which result may then be separately examined, and any of

special interest separated, and cultivated apart in sterile media.

1 Vide Koch, of. cit.

APPENDIX A.

TuE following short description of several of the common species of
fungi and other micro-organisms met with in the course of ordinary
laboratory work, will, we hope, prove of value.

No attempt is made to give a complete classification or resumé of
known species, which will be discussed at length subsequently. The
means of their recognition here supplied will aid the investigator in
the detection and exclusion of possible contaminants.

The naked eye appearances of the growths, as seen on or in various
nutritive media, and their microscopic characters, will be shortly de-
tailed in the case of each.

PENICILLIUM GLAUCUM.
NAKED Eve APPEARANCES.

This is the commonest form of cheese mould, and is recognised
when growing on cheese by its delicate blue colour and soft fluffy
appearance. Its spores are constantly present in the atmosphere in
such large numbers that it is one of the most frequent causes of con-
tamination in cultivations. It will grow on the most varied substances,
and the rapidity of its growth enables it to overpower and exterminate
other growths with which it comes in contact. It prefers free surfaces
for its growth.

On Potato.—It forms a velvety blue-green covering, dotted over
here and there, if the soil be moist, with spherical drops of clear fluid,
which are exhaled by the fungus. If the surface of the growth be
touched, a fine grey powder of spores, like the down from a butterfly’s
wings, adheres to the surface with which it has come in contact.

On Bread Paste,—The growth is similar, but a little more luxuriant,
z.é., the moss-like layer of fungus is thicker than when growing on

otato.
: In Jelly.—On surface, as in two preceding soils (Fig. 46, p. 89).
It forms a blue pellicle, which floats on the layers of gelatine imme-
diately below it, which in the course of time has become liquid,
In centre, as small nodules, with fine silky rays proceeding from
them in all directions (Fig. 43, p. 87).

In Liquids (Urine, Broth, &c.).—As isolated spheres, each the pro-
duct of a single spore. These spheres are soft delicate globes lying in
the lower layers of the liquid, often of large size, and of a semi-trans-
parent grey tint.

122 APPENDIX,

Microscopic APPEARANCES.

Myce.ium.—Branching fibrils combined into a dense network.
This both in liquid and solid media.

Spores.—At the end of the branches of mycelium, on free surfaces.
Spherical spores are produced in small pyramidal clusters by the
transverse division of the terminal twigs, into which the branches
break up at their ends. Spores are not formed except on free sur-
faces; they are never found in growths from liquids, or from the
central portions of gelatine cultures. They are round, comparatively
large (7 p.), and highly refractile. They take on aniline dyes easily,
as does also the mycelium.

GENUS ASPERGILLUS.

Several common species are included under this genus, and the
generic characters which unite them are the nature of the mycelium
and the nature of the. fructification. The Aspergi//us head, bearing
the spores, consists in all cases of a central club-shaped stem, upon
the surface of which the spores are placed. Slight differences in the
shape or colour of these basidia, and of the spores which they
support, determine the names and characters of the species into which
the genus is divided.

A. aLpus (Fig. 24, p. 65). On Potatoes, Bread, Cheese, &¢.—A
pure white woolly looking growth, forming rounded masses, with a
very convex surface.

Jn Gelatine.—On surface grows as on bread, but does not form so
typical a hemisphere as in that substance, the growth being flattened
on the surface, or even in some cases slightly concave. It does not
liquefy gelatine. In the centre of the jelly it forms spherical nodules
of a dull opaque colour, with a distinct limit to their growth peripherally.

In Liquids.—Found as rounded masses at bottom of beaker.

Microscopically.—It has the characteristics of the genus above
described, both basidia and spores being quite free from pigment
granules. Its generally distinctive feature is its intensely white colour.

A. REPENS (Figs. 25 and 26, p. 67). On Potato, &c.—A sage-green
growth with a velvety surface, growing rapidly as a flat field over the
surface of the nutrient soil, and forming a layer not more that o:25 cm.
thick.

In Gelatine-—At surface forms colour due to spores; in centre of
jelly grows as rounded white nodules, in which no spore formation
occurs.

In Liquids.—Floats as green layer on surface.

Microscopically,—Like other species, except that in connection with
the spores there are fine granules of the green pigment. The pig-

°

MUCOR. 123

ment is not within the spores, but forms a powder, amidst which they
lie. Mycelium forms an interlacing network, as in other species.

A. Fumicatus. Ox Potato, &c.—A slate-blue coloured growth,
rapidly extending as a thin paper-like pellicle over the surface of the
nutrient soil. If its lateral extension be checked, the layer becomes
crenated, being thrown into a series of irregular deep furrows and
ridges. Its colour deepens with age to a bronze brown.

Ln Geatine.—F orms coloured nodules at surface, colourless spherules
in centre of jelly ; in the latter no spores are produced.

In Liguids.—F oats on surface as a slate-blue velvety layer.

Microscopically,—As other species, except that fine granules around
spores have a slate-blue colour.

A. GLaucus.—Precisely similar to above, except that on solid
media it does not form a crenated layer, but remains flat ; is soft and
velvety, and of a light brown colour. The colour due to powdered
granules on the basidia, as in other species.

A. FLAVESCENS.—Only differs from above in possessing a light
yellow colour, tinged with light green, and its surface, when grown
on solid media, becomes gently undulating.

A. NIGRESCENS (Fig. 28, p. 69.)—A growth of a deep rusty black
colour; surface velvety, not crenated, when grown on solid media.
Colour due to dark brown pigment granules, lying as fine powder
around spores. Pigment soluble in ammonia. Other characters as
in three preceding species.

A. FuLVvUS.—Growing precisely like 4. g/aucus, but of a coffee
colour.

GENUS MUCOR.

A group of species having a branched, colourless mycelium, the
terminal twigs of which carry spherical sporangia. These sporangia
are hollow receptacles, in which the spores are contained, like small-
shot ina bomb. Differences of species are recognised by the colour
of the sporangia, and by some peculiarities in the mode of growth of
the mycelium. From a large list of known species the following are
selected as those most commonly met with :—

Mucor MUCEDO. On Potato, &c.-—A silky white growth, consisting
of a tangled tuft of glistening hairs, attaining a height of from one to
one and a half inches. At the ends of these fibrils are rounded
glistening bodies, at first white, but soon becoming brown, and then
an intense black. These are the sporangia.

In Gelatine.—Grows rapidly throughout jelly as a glistening net-
work of fibrils, the typical black sporangia only being produced when
it reaches the surface.

124 APPENDIX.

In Liquids.—A floating network of fibrils, with a very few twigs
raised above the surface, on each of which is borne a sporangium.

Microscopically.—Sporangium, when ripe, seen to be delicately
furred on surface; when still unripe, it is quite smooth. Spores
densely packed within, can only be seen by bursting sporangium.
Pigment amongst spores as black powder, and in texture of capsule,
not however in spores themselves. Mycelium consists of greatly
elongated cells, the septa between which can be seen.

M. LicuTHEIMIL.—Like JZ. mucedo in all respects, except that its
growth is not so luxuriant, the mycelium is more delicate, and its
fibrils more attenuated. The sporangia are smaller than in 47. mucedo,
and are not pigmented. (Fig. 23, p. 64.)

M. sTOLONIFER.—Exactly like AZ. mucedo, except that the mycelium
grows in the manner of stolons, shooting into air, and then bending
down, and again entering the nutrient soil. Sporangia black, as in
M. mucedo.

SALMON FUNGUS.—Saprolegnia ferax, an aquatic fungus, which grows
most readily on dead flies or dead fish, especially if they are placed
in running water. It forms a delicate cloud-like mass (an aquatic
mucor) on the surface, and grows very rapidly. Under the micro-
scope are seen tubular branching hyphe, the protoplasmic contents
of which are coarsely granular. Reproductive organs elongated, club-
shaped zoosporangia, which open laterally or terminally, and rounded
oogonia, in which are oospores. The zoospores which escape from
the zoosporangia are usually ciliated or tailed.

The growth does not appear to pass deeply into the tissue of its
host.

Closely allied to this species are the Achlya polyandra and Achlya
apiculata.

GENUS PENOSPORA.

PENOSPORA INFESTANS is the most important member of this group,
which contains nearly forty known species. It is the cause of the
potato disease. The full-grown fungus consists of a branched my-
celium 0’oo05 millimetre in thickness, upon the terminal twigs of
which oval conidia are supported. The mycelium and conidia pro-
duce together a thin grey pellicle, which adheres firmly to the diseased
parts of the plant, notably the green stems and the under surface of
the leaves. The diseased portions of the plant itself become withered
and brown. The mycelium spreads far and wide through the plant,
and soon reaches the tubers. In this position it remains during the
winter, and, growing up within the young shoots of the new plant,
develops once more its mature conidia upon the free surfaces of its
host. The spores, falling to the ground, become actively moving
swarm-spores, and attack other plants with which they come in

TORULA. 125

contact. This parasite should be looked for on the under surface of
the youngest leaves, where the brown patch, with grey pellicle, forms
the characteristic feature of its presence.

GENUS TORULA.

The members of this genus come under the heading of the
“ sprouting fungi,” and have thus much in common, that their mode
of multiplication consists in a budding of daughter cells from the
protoplasmic contents of the parent cell, and their separation and
free growth as individual plants. In their adult forms all consist of
rounded or oval cells, with a distinct limiting membrane and soft
protoplasmic contents.

TORULA CEREVISIZ.—Jm grape juice, appears in two forms. Low
yeast forms a fine amorphous deposit of a yellow grey colour in the
lower layers of the liquid. Aigh yeast forms a layer of neutral tinted
matter close to the surface of the liquid, and this layer has more
coherence than is the case with the lower yeast. Each layer consists
of aggregations of oval cells; the lower layer being made up of separate
cells, the cells of the upper layer being in more intimate organic connec-
tion with one another. The cells are oval, and 8 to g p». in length;
either separate, or in short branching chains. In some of the cells
are contained three or four spores, each 4 or 5 mw. in diameter.
The plant will grow freely in saccharated solutions, or in Pasteur’s fluid.

Pink Toruta. On Potato, &c.—Grows as a rose-coloured succulent
film, if the soil be moist. On bread paste, if not very moist, it has
the appearance of pink coral (see Fig. 16, p. 59).

In Gelatine.—It grows most freely at the surface, where it produces
its characteristic colour. It grows below the surface to a less extent,
following the line of the inoculating wire, and in this position it
assumes a grey tint, with a slight shade of pink in it (Fig. 39, p. 84).

Microscopically.—It consists of rounded or slightly oval cells 5
to 8 pw. in diameter; and it is found that the pigment is here
present in the cells themselves, each of which has a delicate yellow
tint, so that when aggregated in large numbers the prevailing pink
colour is produced.

The spores of this organism are very widely disseminated, and are
so universally present in the air that it.forms one of the most frequent
atmospheric contaminants of pure cultivation (Fig. 46, p. 89).

Brack Toruta. Ox Potato, &-c.—Grows as a dull sooty crust, with
-a dry, slightly furrowed surface. On bread paste it has a similar
appearance (see Fig. 30, p. 71).
Jn Gelatine.—It grows chiefly at the surface as a black heaped-up
mass, and to a less extent in the track of the inoculating needle,
where it forms small black nodules.

126 APPENDIX.

In Miik.—It forms a floating black crust, with a dusky grey tint on
its upper surface. The milk itself becomes of a muddy colour from
an invasion of the deeper layers by colonies of the organism.

Microscopically.—Like Pink Torula, but with a dark brown pigment.

MYcODERMA AceTI. Jn Grape /uice—The vinegar plant appears
as a floating film, which rapidly covers the whole of the surface of the
liquid. It is a typical aérobe, and cannot live in the lower strata of
the liquid. This necessity of oxygen permits of its exclusion from
beer vats, the empty air space at the surface being in this case filled
with carbonic acid gas, which inhibits the growth of the plant. The
film is either corrugated to a very great extent, or it may be quite
smooth, depending on the exact species present.

Microscopically—The film is found to consist of immense aggrega-
tions of elliptical or cylindrical cells 6 4. long by 2 or 3 p. broad,
arranged in irregular branching chains. Multiplication, as in the
Torule proper, by buds and by spores, which appear in the central
portions of the cell contents.

MM. aceti will also grow feebly on hay infusion, but not on the
animal infusions.

Sarcina. Jn Mitk.—Causes a dense coagulum, which sinks in
irregular masses to the bottom of the whey, which replaces the
sterile milk.

Microscopically.—Three species are recognised :—

S. ventriculi—Round cells in clusters of four or multiples of four.
Cells about 4 y. in diameter, with cell contents frequently
pigmented yellow or light brown.

In the stomach they do not form such large aggregations as
in artificial media (¢g., milk), the layer colonies being pro-
bably broken up by mechanical unrest.

S. urine.—Cells very small, 1 ». diameter, mode of growth and
reaction in milk similar to those of S. ventricu#i, Found in
fresh urine.

S. Ayatina.—Round cells, 2 y. diameter, forming clusters which
lie in a hyaline matrix. Found in ditch water.

BACTERIDA.

Short cylindrical freely moveable cells, with or without flagella ; in
some cases alternating with an intermediate stage, in which the im-
mobile organisms are collected together into zooglea masses.

BACTERIUM TERMO. On Potato.—It forms a dusky grey glutinous
layer, covering rapidly the whole of the cut surface. At the edges,
where the process of multiplication is most rapid, the film has a cor-
rugated appearance.

BACTERID.. 127

In Gelatine.—Within twenty-four hours this rapidly growing organ-
ism has produced a dimple-like depression in the surface,of the
gelatine at the point of inoculation. ‘This shortly afterwards becomes
a funnel-shaped cavity filled with a turbid liquid, in which a faint
tinge of opalescent green is evident. By the third or fourth day the
upper strata of the jelly are liquefied, and the liquid possesses a bright
iridescent green colour (Fig. 44, p. 87). Within a week or ten days the
whole of the nutrient jelly has liquefied, and the green gradually gives
place to a deep citron colour in the liquid. Grown in jelly, B. zermo
produces little or no odour.

Ln Liquid Media.—B. termo produces a dense turbidity, equally
disseminated throughout the liquid. Its growth is accompanied by
a very penetrating putrescent odour.

Microscopically.—In its freely moving form &. ¢ermo appears as a
small dumb-bell, about 1 ». long and o’5 pw. broad. Long flagella
attached to each end have been described by Dallinger. The organ-
isms have an irregular flickering movement, appearing to rotate on
their own long axes, and gliding alternately in either direction,
usually in straight lines, but at times describing curves or looped
figures in their onward progress.

In its zooglea form the bacterium appears as short straight rods,
clustered together in a clear transparent jelly-like mass, many of the
organisms undergoing division by transverse fission. In this stage the
organism lies quiescent, and the flagella are absent. The zooglea mass
often forms an iridescent scum on the surface of decomposing liquids,

BACTERIUM LINEOLA. Oz fotato this organism forms a film identical
in appearance with that produced by JZ. ¢ermo, but tending to grow
rather more rapidly and luxuriantly. In jelly and in liquid media,
there are precisely similar reactions to those produced by the presence
of Zermo. It is only by its microscopic characters that B. Zineola
can be differentiated. In its freely moving form it is elliptical in
shape and about 5 p. long by 2 p. broad ; it also has two flagella, one
at either end, and moves in the same manner as Z. fermo. With this
form alternates a zooglea form, where great numbers of immobile
organisms are aggregated together within a delicate jelly-like mass.
This organism is found in all putrefying animal matter, and is one of
those associated with putrescent odours.

BACTERIUM LacTIs.—In milk, produces the characteristic odour
and taste of sour milk, but does not cause coagulation, as _Imany
micro-organisms do.

Microscopically.—It consists of small dumb-bells, 2». x 1 p., which
have very active movements. Here and there they are found aggre-
gated into clusters, which seem to represent the zooglea stage of this
organism.

BacTERIUM XANTHINUM.—Grows in boiled milk, producing a slight
yellow colour. A small bacterium, apparently identical morphogically
with B. fermo.

128 APPENDIX.

BACILLI.

Longer or shorter cylindrical cells, growing longitudinally, and
dividing by transverse cleavage. Ultimately they tend to grow into
long threads (Leptothrix), along the course of which highly refractile
round spores are produced. The spores are set free, and under
favourable conditions reproduce the bacillus form. Bacilli often form
clusters, but very seldom are found in zooglea masses.

BACILLUS sUBTILIS. Ox Potato, &c.—Forms a very moist, trans-
parent, jelly-like film, which rapidly spreads itself over the nutrient
surface, and has a clear glistening appearance.

In Gelatine.—It causes liquefaction slowly from above downwards,
giving rise to a granular white precipitate at the bottom of the
liquefied portions, and growing downwards in the tracks of the in-
oculating needle as dense opaque spikes.

Microscopically.—It consists of rods, usually about 2 yw. thick by
6 or 8 ». long. Growth takes place rapidly; and at a slightly ele-
vated temperature (35° C.) it is possible to observe the process of
longitudinal growth and transverse cleavage, which accompanies the
multiplication of these organisms, fully carried out within thirty or
forty minutes (Fliigge). In liquid media the organism moves
actively by two flagella—one at each end. The spores are of an
oval shape, and thicker than the rods.

BACILLUS ANTHRACIS. On Potato (see Fig. 15, p. 58).—It forms a
cream-coloured layer of a succulent consistence, which grows rapidly
at slightly elevated temperatures.

In Gelatine (see Fig. 37).—Causes liquefaction of the jelly, and the
characteristic reactions described on p. 84.

In Liguid Media.—\t forms a fine filmy cloud in the lower strata of
the liquid, and after a time is deposited as a fine powder on the floor
of the beaker in which it is cultivated.

Microscopically —It is indistinguishable from B. subzilis in its rod-
like stage. In liquid media the rods are described to be flagellate
and mobile, and similar to B. sudtdis in all respects. In its spore
formation there is, however, a slight difference. The spores of
B. anthracis are spherical, and are not thicker than the lengthened
rods, in the continuity of which they appear; and in this stage the
organisms can be easily differentiated.

BACILLUS TUBERCULOSIS. On Serum (see Fig. 55).—For description
see p. 104. It refuses to grow well in other nutrient media.

Microscopically.—Consists of small thin nodules, often curved, and
frequently possessing a bearded appearance, due to spore formation.
The bacilli measure about 4 » in length by o's yw. in breadth, and the
spores are not broader than the rods. For special methods of stain-
ing it, see § 27, p 39.

BACILII. 129

Bacillus LEPRE. Microscopically.—Almost identical with the
tubercle bacillus, but is found in different relations to the cell elements
of its host.

BacILLUS MALARI& (Klebs).—A small organism found free in the
Pontine Marshes and in the swamps of America, 2 to 7 p. in length
by 1 p. in breadth, growing into long fibrils, and multiplying by
transverse cleavage. By some it is supposed to be the cause of
malaria.

BacitLus oF BLUE Mitx. Jn Mi/k.—A dark purple colour is
produced by the rapid multiplication of the organism. The milk
does not curdle, and retains its ordinary consistence.

in Gelatine—A small rounded mass occupies the surface of the
jelly at the seat of inoculation, and from this a delicate opaque
spike passes downwards in the track of the inoculating wire, and the
whole of the jelly becomes tinged with a peculiar green tint, which
is modified according as it is viewed with direct or oblique illumina-
tion.

Microscopically.—Short rods 2°5 ». long which are often connected
end toend. Jn fluid media they perform rapid movements similar
to those of 2B. zermo.

FLUORESCING BACILLUS.—See description of Fig. 36, p. 81,
VIOLET BACILLUS.—See description of Fig. 35, p. 81.

Bacittus or Mouse SEpricamia.—Zn gelatine, it grows rapidly,
giving the appearance of a very attenuated cloud, most distinctly
visible by oblique illumination. The appearance is due to the
bacilli, each lengthening into a spiral fibril in the jelly mass.

Microscopically—They are extremely small rods, only rp. in
length and o'z p. in breadth, so that they are only to be seen with
very high powers of the microscope. They occupy the “guor
sanguinis and the interior of the white blood corpuscles of the
blood of the house-mouse, but they are unable to develop themselves
in that of the field-mouse.

MICROCOCCI.

Micrococcus propiciosus. Oz Potato, Bread, &c.—Forms a thick
creamy film of an intensely bright crimson colour, which grows with
ae ane and covers the whole of the nutrient surface (Fig. 19,
p. 61).

Ln Gelatine.—It causes liquefaction rapidly, and gives its character-
istic hue to the liquid portions.

in Milk, &c.—It produces a deposit with the typical crimson
colour.

I

130 APPENDIX.

Microscopically—Small round cocci, 4-1 mw. in diameter, which are
not themselves pigmented, but which excrete the granular particles
of pigment, which give the growth so distinctive an appearance.

Micrococcus oF OsTEo-Myexitis. Jn Vutrient Media.—See
description, p. 86, and Figs. 29 and 38.

Microscopically—A small spherical micrococcus found in large
numbers in the pus from the abscesses of bone, which occur in cases
of acute osteo-myelitis. They tend to form small circular clusters
which float free in the Zguor puris.

PYOGENETIC MICROCOCCI.

1. STAPHYLOCOCCUS PYOGENES ALBUS. J7 Gelatine.—Causes rapid
liquefaction, forming a funnel-shaped depression in the line of the in-
oculating needle; at the bottom of this is seen a dense granular pre-
cipitate of a grey colour. The whole of the jelly soon becomes liquid.

On Sterile Serum.—It forms a pearly white succulent growth on the
surface of the serum following the line in which the seed material
was implanted.

“Microscopically —It consists of large irregular clusters of cocci
(Staphylococcus) lying loose in the pus, or in some cases applied to
and surrounding individual pus cells as a tunic. Found in contents
of newly opened acute abscesses.

2. STAPHYLOCOCCUS PYOGENES AUREUS. Jn Ge/atine.—Causes lique-
faction rapidly, and a dense granular precipitate of an orange colour at
the bottom of the liquid.

On Sterile Serum.—lIt forms a creamy growth of a bright orange
colour, covering the surface of the serum at the point of inoculation.

Microscopically.—Irregular clusters of cocci, indistinguishable from
the preceding species, except when cultivated artificially. It occurs
in acute abscesses, whitlows, and boils.

3. STREPTOCOCCUS PYOGENES. Jn Ge/atine—Causes a funnel-
shaped liquefied depression in the jelly, and forms a light yellow
precipitate. The whole of the nutrient jelly in time becomes
liquid.

"On Serum.—it forms a delicate light yellow film, with a dry
powdery consistence, growing in irregular serpentine patches on the
surface of the serum.

Microscopically.—Long chains of cocci (Streptococcus) twisted and
contorted in various directions, also in shorter chains, rarely isolated.
It is found in pye@mic abscesses, and in the tissues in cases of moist
gangrene.

LIST OF SOME ANTISEPTIC SUBSTANCES,

ANTISEPTICS.

131

With the Minimum Degree of Concentration in Watery Solutions in
whith they are reliable kadopiel Jrom Migquet).

Oxygenated water (solution of peroxide o of hydrogen),
Perchloride of mercury, . F

Nitrate of silver,
Todine,
Perchloride of gold,

Perchloride of platinum,

Hydrocyanic acid,
Bromine,

Sulphate of copper,
Chloroform, .
Chloride of zinc,
Thymic acid,
Carbolic acid,

Permanganate of ae

Alum,
Boric ‘acid,
Salicylate of soda, . .

to 2000
» 1425
95 1250
» 400
»» 400
» 333
» «250
3 166
» IO
35 66
” 52
bad 50
39 3r
= 28
‘3 22
” 13
55 10

AP PEN DIX 3B;

—+4+—

LITERATURE.

In the following Bibliographical List, a certain classification has
been attempted, but the authors of many of the larger works, and
even papers, go over such an enormous mass of fact, detail, and
experiment, that it is almost impossible in the space at command to
mention each work under all the headings of the subject-matter of
which it treats. Each work is therefore usually mentioned ‘but once,
and then under the name of the most important subject that is dis-
cussed in it. However incomplete the list may be, great care has
been taken to make it accurate, and in nearly every instance the
reference has been verified. The authors will be glad to receive
additional references.

ACTINOMYCES.
BoLLINGER—Centralbl. f. d. med. Wissensch., Berlin, Bd. xv., 1877.

FirkKeT—Reyv. de Méd., Paris, 1884.
FLEMING—Actinomykosis, London, 1883.—(See p. 52 for very full list of
Literature. ) i

GanNnET—Boston Med. and Surg. Journ., Aug. 1882.

Hrink—Centralbl. f. d. med. Wissensch., Berlin, Bd. xix., 1881.
sf Lbid., Bd. xx., 1882.

IsRaEL—Archiv f. pathol. anat., Bd. xcv., p. 125, 1884.
sy Lbid., Bd. xcvi., p. 175, 1884.
of Centralbl. f. d. med. Wissensch., Berlin, Bd. xxi., 1883.

- JouNE—Deutsche Ztschr. f.:Thiermed., Bd. vii., 1881.

PrL_uc—Oesterr. Vrtljschr. f. wissensch. Veterinark., Wien, Bd. Ivili., p. 13, 1882.
PriicEr—Centralbl. f. d. med. Wissensch., Berlin, Bd. xx., 1882.
PonFick—Die Actinomykose des Menschen, Berlin, 1882.

Treves—Lancet, vol. i., p. 107, 1884.
VircHow—Archiv f. pathol. anat., Bd. xcv., p. 534, 1884.

WIEDERHOLD—Atchiv f. pathol. anat., Bd. xxxiii., p. 551, 1865.

LITERATURE. 133

ANTHRAX, CHARBON, &c.*

ARCHANGELSKI—Centralbl. f. d. med. Wissensch., Berlin, Bd. xxi., p. 410, 1883.
ARLOING, CORNEVIN, et THoMAs—Arch. vét., Paris, t. vi., pp. 721-27, 1881.

35 5 Lbid., t. vii., pp. 767-771, 1882.
ivy ais Compt. rend. Acad. d. sc., Paris, t. xc., pp.
1302-5, 1880.

55 5 Ibid. t. xci., pp. 734-36, 1880.

65 is Lbid., t. xcii., p. 1246-48, 1881.

55 3 Lbid., t. xciii., pp. 605-9, 1881.

an 5 Lbid., t. xcv., pp. 189-91, 1882.

¥ 55 Lbid., t. xcvii., p. 1071, 1883.

a rr Compt. rend. Soc. de biol., Paris, 7s., t. iv.,

pp- 121-28, 1882.
9 5s Du Charbon bacterien; charbon sympto-

matique et charbon essentiel de Chabert ;
Pathogenie et inoculations preventives,
Paris, 1883.

53 bs J. de méd. vét. et zootech., Lyon, 3 s., t.
vi., pp. 290-300, 1881.
5 “4 Rec. de méd. vét., Paris, 6 s., t. ix., pp.

467-72, 1882.

BERT, PAuL—Compt. rend. Soc. de biol., Paris, 6 s., t. iv., pp. 317-20, 1877.

re Lbid,, 6 s., t. v., p. 133, 1878.

3 Lbid., 6 s., t. vi., p. 19, 1879.
BoLLINGER—Centralbl. f. d. med. Wissensch., Berlin, Bd. x., 1872.

oe Handbuch der Hygiene, &c., Bd. iii., Leipzig, 1882.

BouLEy—Bull. Acad. de méd., Paris, 2 s., t. ix., pp. 942-55, 1880.
53 Lbid., 2 s.,t. X., pp. 1426-47, 1881.
53 Compt. rend. Acad. d. sc., Paris, t. xcii., pp. 1383-87, 1831.
is Lbid., t. xciii, pp. 531-37, 1881.
BRAUELL—Atchiv f. pathol. anat., Bd. xi., 1857.
35 Lbid., Bd. xiv., 1858.
BRYANT, T.—Trans. Path. Soc., London, vol. xxxiv., p. 293, 1883.
BucuNEeR—Archiv f. pathol. anat., Bd. xci., pp. 410-22, 1883.

35 Fortschritte d. medicin, Bd. i., p. 439, 1883.

55 In von Nageli Untersuch. u. niedere Pilze, Miinchen, 1882.

is Sitzungbs. d. k. Akad. d. Wissensch., Wien, Bd. x, pp. 368-423,
1880.

Fe U. d. exper. Erzeugung d. Milzbrandcontagiums aus d. Heupilzen,

Miinchen, 1880. ;
BuRDON-SANDERSON—Trans. Med. Chir. Soc. London, vol. lvi., p. 345, 1873.

CHAMBERLAND—Le charbon et la vaccination charboneuse d’aprés les travaux
récent de M. Pasteur, Paris, 1883.
CHAMBERLAND et Roux—Compt. rend. Acad. d. sc., Paris, t. xcvi., pp. 1088,
1410, 1883.

1 These are grouped together for convenience, as the work on these subjects is so intimately
connected.

‘

134 APPENDIX.

CHAMBRELENT et Moussons—Compt. rend. Acad. d. sc, Paris, t. xcvii., p.

1142, 1883.
CHAUVEAU—Compt. rend. Acad. d. sc., Paris, t. xc., pp. 1396-1400, 1526-30,
1880, -
i Lbid., t. xci., pp. 33-36, 648-52, 1880.
3 Lbid., t. xcii., p. 844-48, 1881.
7 Jbid., t. xciv., pp. 1694-98, 1882.
ss Lbid., t. xevi., pp. 533, 612, 678, 1471, 1883.

Gaz. d. hép., Paris, t. liv., pp. 353, 61, 1881.
Coun_—Beitr. z Biol, d. Pflanz., Bredlau, Bd. ii., 1876,
CoLin—Bull. Acad. de méd., Paris, 2s., t. ii, 1873.

» Lbid., 25., t. vii, p. 199, 1878.

Pe Lbid., 2s., t. viii, p. 843, 1879.

» dLbid., 2s., t. ix., p. 650, 1880.

», Lbid., 2s., t. x., pp. 103-28, 694, 1881.

» Rec. de méd., vét., Paris, 6s., t. vii., pp. 72, 177, 1880.

DavaIne—Compt. rend. Acad. d. sc., Paris, t. Ivii., pp. 220, 351, 356, 1863.

35 Lbid., t. lix., p. 393, 1863.

si Lbid., t. 1x., p. 1296, 1865.

5 Jbid., t. 1xi., pp. 334, 368, 1866.

oe Lbid., t. \xxvii., p. 726, 821, 1873.

= Compt. rend. Soc. de biol., Paris, 6s., t. i., 1874.

Rec. de méd. vét., Paris, 6 s., t. iv., 1877.

Deane et RAIMBERT—Compt. rend. Read. d. sc., Paris, t. lix., 1864.
Davirs-CoLLEY—Trans. Path. Soc., London, vol. xxxiv., p. 291, 1883.
DowpeEswELL, G. F,—Rep. Med. Off. Local Gov. Boat, 1883.

EserTH—Archiv f. pathol. anat., Bd. Ixxx., p. 311, 1880.

FALK—Archiv f. pathol. anat., Bd. xciii., 1883.
FokKER—Archiv f. pathol. anat., Bd. Ixxxviii., p. 49, 1882.
Ais Centralbl. f. d. med. Wissensch., Berlin, Bd. xviii., p. 817, 1880.
<3 Lbid., Bd. xix., p. 20, 1881.
FriscH—Sitzungsb. d. k. Akad. d. Wissensch., Wien, Bd. Ixxiv., 1877.
we Lbid., Bd. Ixxx., 1879.

GAFFKY—Mittheil. aus d. k. Gesundheitsamte, Bd. i., Berlin, 1881.
GrBiER, P.—Compt. rend. Acad. d. sc., Paris, t. xciv., p. 1605, 1882.
GRaDLE—Bacteria and the Germ Theory of Disease, p. 149, Chicago, 1883.
GREENFIELD—Journ. Roy. Agric. Soc. Eng., London, 2 s., vol. xvi., pp.
273-311, 1880,
ss Proc, Roy. Soc., London, vol. xxx., p. 557, 1880.
7 Quart. Journ. Micr. Sc., Lond., n. s., vol. xx., p. 374, 1879.
Rep. Med. Off. Local Gov. Board, 1881,

Grim—Archiv f pathol. anat., Bd. liv., p. 262, 1872.

HABERKORN—Bot. Centralbl., Bd. x., p. 100, 1882.
Huser, K.—Deutsche med, Wchnschr., Berlin, Bd. vii., 1881.

KLEtN—Quart. Journ. Micr. Sc., Lond., 1. s., vol. xxiy., p. 260, 1883.

LITERATURE. 135

KLErn—Reps. Med. Off. Local Gov. Board, 1881, 1882, 1883.
Kocu—Beitr. z. Biol. d. Pflanz., Breslau, Bd. ii., heft ii., 1876.

5) Berl. klin. Wchnschr., Bd. xv., 1878.

+5 Fortschritte d. medicin, Bd. i., p. 42, 1883.

st Vinoculation préventive du charbon, Berlin, 1883.

a5 Mittheil. aus d. k. Gesundheitsamte, Bd. i., pp. 1-49, Berlin, 1881.

LepPLAT et JAILLARD—Compt. rend. Acad. d. sc., Paris, t. Ixi, pp. 298
436, 1865.

NocarbD et MOLLEREAU—Bull. Acad. de méd., Paris, 2 5., t. xii., 1883.

OEMLER—Atch. f. wissensch. u. prakt. Thierh., Berlin, Bd. iv., p. 261, 1878.
a Lbid., Bd. v., p. 164, 1879.
si Lbid., Bd. vi., p. 401, 1880.

O.Live, C.—Compt. rend. Acad. d. sc., Paris, t. Ixxxix., p. 792, 1879.

PasTtEUR—Arch. vét., Paris, t. vii., pp. 177, 417, 1882.

3 Bull. Acad. de méd., Paris, 2 s., t. viii., pp. 1222-34, 1879.
5 Compt. rend. Acad. d.sc., Paris, t. xc., p. 239, 1880.
ss Lbid., t. xci., pp. 86, 315, 455, 531, 673, 697, 1880.

59 Ibid, t. xcii., pp. 209, 429, 662, 1378, 1881.
is Lbid., t. xcv., p. 1250, 1882.
$3 Lbid., t. xcvi., p. 979, 1883.
5 Rec. de méd. vét., Paris, 6s., t. vi., p. 193, 1879.
a Rev. scient., Paris, t. xxxi., p. 74, 1883.
Trans. Internat. Med. Cong. London, vol. i., 1881.
Case a et CHAMBERLAND—Compt. rend. Acad. d. sc., Paris, t. xci.,

Pp. 531, 1880.
PASTEUR et JOUBERT— /did., t. Ixxxiv., p. 900, 1877.
oF Lbid., t. lxxxv., p. 101, 1877.

PASTEUR, JOUBERT, et CHAMBERLAND—/67d., t. Ixxxvii., p. 47, 1878.
PoLLENDER—Vrtljschr. f. gerichtl. Med., Berlin, Bd. viii., 1855.
+ Lbid., Bd. xxxvi., 1885.

Roper, A.—Compt. rend. Acad. d. sc., Paris, t. xciv., p. 1060, 1882.
Contribution 4 l’étude experimentelle de Charbon Bacteridien,
s Lyon, 1881.
RoOLoFF u. EcGELING—Fortschritte d. medicin, Bd. i., p. 822, 1883.
RoszaHEGyI, A.—Biol. Centralbl., Erlangen, Bd. ii., p. 97, 1882.
55 Practitioner, London, vol. xxviii., pp. 152, 227, 1882.
Roy—Nature, vol. xxix., p. 91, 1883.

”

SEMMER—Centralbl. f. d. med. Wissensch., Berlin, Bd. xviii., 1880.

oe Lbid., Bd. xxii., 1884.

73 Der Milzbrand u. das Milzbrandcontagium, Jena, 1882.
SIEDAMGROTZKY—Deutsche Ztschr. f. Thiermed., Bd. i., 1875.
S1GNoL—Compt. rend. Acad. d. sc., Paris, t. lvii., p. 348, 1863.
Spears—Reps. Med. Off. Local Gov. Board, 1881-1882.
STERNBERG, G. M.—Am. Monthly Micr. Journ., N. Y., vol. ii., 1881.
Straus—Arch. de physiol. norm. et path., 3s., t.i., p. 298, 1883.

136 APPENDIX.

Straus et CHAMBERLAND—Arch. de physiol. norm, et path. 3s. t- i, p 436,
1883.
Gaz. hobd. de méd., Paris, t. xx., p. 167, 1883.
SzPILMAN—Ztschr. f. physiol. Chem., Strassburg, Bd. iv., p. 350, 1880.

ToussaINt—Bull. Acad. de méd., Paris, 2s., t. x., p. 301, 1881.

a Compt. rend. Acad. d. sc., Paris, t. Ixxxv., pp. 415, 1076, 1877.

5 Lbid., t. lxxxvi., pp. 725, 833, 1878.

53 Lbid., t. Ixxxvii., p. 69, 1878.

‘5 Ibid, t. xci., p. 135, 1880.

55 dbid,, t. xciii., p. 163, 1881.

+ Recherches expérimentales sur la maladie charbonneuse, Paris, 1879.

VILLEMIN—Bull. Acad. de méd., Paris, 2 s., t. x., p. 622, 1881.

WacHENHEIM, E.—Etude experimentelle sur la septiceté et la virulence du sang
charbonneux, Nancy, 1880.

WEIGERT—Jahresb. d. schles. Gesellsch. f. vaterl. Kult., Breslau, Bd. lv., p. 317,
1878. .

WILHELM, E.—Der Milzbrand, mechanisch, physisch und chemisch erklart,
Liegnitz, 1881.

WILLIAMs—Principles and Practice of Veterinary Medicine, Edin., 1885.

ZopF—Die Spaltpilze, Breslau, 1883.
45 Zur Morphologie der Spaltpflanzen, Leipzig, 1882.

ANTISEPTICS.
ApAms—Brit. Med. Journ., vol. ii., 1873.

BAIERLACHER—Aerztl. Int.-Bl., Miinchen, 1876.
BAXTER—Practitioner, London, vol. xi., p. 321-351, 1873.
eG Public Health, London, vol. vi., p. 301, 1877.

Brvoin—Compt. rend. Acad. d. sc., Paris, t. Ixxxii., pp. 1169, 89, 1876.
BocHEFONTAINE—Arch. de physiol. norm. et path., 2 s., t. v., pp. 389, 724, 1873.
BucHoLtTz—Arch. f. exper. Path. u. Pharmakol., Leipzig, Bd. ii., p. 159, 1874.

5 Lbid., Bd. iv., pp. 1-81, 159-167, 1875.

= Lbid,, Bd. vii., pp. 81-100, 1877.

3 Ueber das Verhalten von Bakterien zu einigen Antisepticis,

Dorpat, 1876.

CALVERT, C.—Med. Times and Gazette, vol. i-ii., 1872,

CAMERER—Wurtemb. Med. Corr.-Bl., 1875.

Cér1—Trans. Internat. Med. Cong. London, vol. i., pp. 466-72, 1881.

CHAMBERLAND—Compt. rend. Acad. d. sc., Paris, t. Ixxxviii., p. 659, 1874.

CHAMBERLAND et Roux—Jdid,, t. xevi., p. 1088, 1883.

Cuappuis, E.—Bull. Soc. Chim., t. xxxv., p. 390.

CHAUVEAU—Compt. rend. Acad. d. sc., Paris, t. xcvi., pp. 553, 612, 78, 82, 1883.
on Lbid., t. xeviii., pp. 73, 126, 1232, 1884.

LITERATURE. 137

CHIENE—Amer. Practitioner, March 1880, with List of Literature.

CHIRONE, V.—Bull. d. sc. med. di Bologna, 6., t. vi., pp. 5-24, 1880.

CoHN u. MENDELSOHN—Beitr. z. Biol. d. Pflanz., Breslau, Bd. iii. p. 141,
1879.

CROWTHER, W. H.—Med. Times and Gazette, vol. ii., p. 261, 1879.

DALLINGER—Journ. Roy. Micr. Soc., London, vol. iii., p. 1, 1880.
DavaInE—Compt. rend. Acad. d. sc., Paris, t. Ixxvii., p. 821, 1873.
oF Compt. rend. Soc. de biol., Paris, 6s., t. i, 1874.
DE LA Cro1x—aArch. f. exper. Path. u. Pharmakol, Leipzig, Bd. xiii., pp. 175-
225, 1880.
DoucaLLt—Brit. Med. Joum., vol. ii., p. 726, 1879.
op Glasgow Med. Journ., vol. viii., p. 427, 1876.
35 Med. Times and Gazette, vol. i., 1872.
55 Public Health, London, vol. iii., p. 277, 1875.
Duvitsk11—Table of Disinfectants, Wilna, 1879.

ErpamM—Beitr. z. Biol. d. Pflanz., Breslau, Bd. i., p. 208, 1870,
ENGELMANN—Reyv. internat. sc. biol., 1882.
EULENBURG u. VOHL—Vrtljschr. f. gerichtl. Med., Berlin, 1870.

Faye—Compt. rend. Acad. d. sc., Paris, t. Ixxi., p. 415, 1870.
FIEssINGER—Rev. méd. de lest, Nancy, t. xiv., p. 262, 1882.
FiscHER—Artikel ‘‘ Desinfection” im Neues Handworterbuch der Chemie.

+, wU. PROSKAUER—Mittheil. aus d. k. Gesundheitsamte, Bd. ii., Berlin,

1884.

FLEcK—Benozesaure, etc., Miinchen, 1875.
FRANKLAND—Proc. Roy. Soc., London, vol. xxv., p. 542, 1877.
FRIsCcH--Sitzungsb. d. k. Akad. d. Wissensch., Wien, Bd. Ixxv., 1877.

9 Lbid., Bd. Ixxx., 1879.

GAFFKY—Mittheil. aus d. k. Gesundheitsamte, Bd, i., p. 188, Berlin, 1881.
GALTIER—Compt. rend. Acad. d. sc., Paris, t. xci., p. 475, 1880.

HAMLET, W. M.—Journ. Chem. Soc., Lond., vol. xxxix., p. 326, 1881.
HAatTrTon, F.—Journ. Chem. Soc., Lond., vol. xxxix., p. 247, 1881.
HEYDENREICH—Compt. rend. Acad. d. sc., Paris, t. xcviii., p. 998, 1884.
HorNEMANN—Hyg. Medd., Kjobenh., vol. iii.

Hipre—Mittheil. aus d. k. Gesundheitsamte, Bd. i., p. 188, Berlin, 1881.

KLETZINSKY—Wien. med. Wchnschr., 1866.
Kocu—Beitr. z. Biol. d. Pflanz., Breslau, Bd. ii., heft 2, 1876.

35 Mittheil. aus d. k. Gesundheitsamte, Bd. i., pp. 1, 188, Berlin, 1881.
KRAMERS—Public Health, London, vol. vii., p. 37, 1877.

LassAR—Deutsche med. Wchnschr., Berlin, Bd. vi., 1880.
LEBEDEFF, A.—Arch. de physiol. norm, et path., 2s., t. x., pp. 175-204, 1882.
LretHEBY—Glasgow Med. Journ., n. s., vol. v., 1873.
oe Public Health, London, vol. ii., 1874.
LOFFLER—Mittheil. aus d. k. Gesundheitsamte, Bd. i., p. 188, Berlin, 1881.

138 APPENDIX.

MANSFIELD—Med. and Surg. Reporter, Phila., vol. xxxvi.

MEHLHAUSEN—Ber. d. Chol. Comm. fiir das deutsche Reich, Bd. iv., p.-341.

MERKE—Archiv f. pathol. anat., Bd. Ixxxi., 1880.

MEyvER, H.—Ueber das Milch sdureferment und sein Verhalten gegen Antiseptica,
Dorpat, 1880.

MORsSCHELL—Deutsche med. Wchnschr., Berlin, Bd. vi., 1880.

NAGELI—Die niederen Pilze, Miinchen, 1877.

5 Sitzungsb. d. k.-bayer. Akad. d. Wissensch. zu Miinchen, 1879.
NeEnckiI—Journ. f. prakt. Chem., Leipzig, n.s., Bd. xix., p. 337, 1879.
Notrer, J. L.—Army M. Dep. Rep., 1878, London, vol. xx., p. 217, 1880.

»” Dublin Journ. Med. Sc., vol. Ixviii., p. 196, 1879.

PasTEUR—Ann. Whyg., Paris, 3 s., t. iv., p. 97, 1880.

a Compt. rend. Acad. d. sc., Paris, t. Ixxxix., p. 1015, 1879.
PictaT et YuNc—Compt. rend. Acad. d. sc., Paris, t. xcviii., p. 747, 1884.
PETRUSCHKY—Deutsche mil. -rztl. Ztschr., Berlin, Bd. ii., p. 127, 1873.
PFLUGER—Arch. f. d. ges. physiol., Bonn, Bd. v., p. 538, 1872.

RANSOME—Brit. Med. Journ., vol. ii., 1873.
REGNARD—Compt. rend. Acad. d. sc., Paris, t. xcviii., p. 744, 1884.
RussELL—Glasgow Med. Journ., vol. xxii., p. 401, 1884.

SaLKowskI—Vrtljschr. f. gerichtl. Med., Berlin, 1875.
SCHOLL u. FiscHER--Mittheil. aus d. k. Gesundheitsamte, Bd. ii., Berlin, 1834.
ScHROTER—Beitr. z. Biol. d. Pflanz., Breslau, Bd. i., heft iii.
SIEBER—Journ. f. prakt. Chem., Leipzig, n. s., Bd. xix., p. 433, 1879.
SmitTH—Disinfectants, &c., Edin., 1869.
SoyKa—Ber. d. bayer. Akad. d. Wissensch., 1879.
STEINBERG—Kriegslazarethe, etc., 1872.
STERNBERG—Med. Rec., N. Y., vol. xxii., p. 314, 1882.
+9 Nat. Bd. Health Bull., Wash., 1879.

TEDEsco—Arch. méd. belges, Brux., 1875.

THAN—Ann. d. Chem., Leipzig, Bd. cxcviii.
ToussAINT—Bull. Acad. de méd., Paris, 2 s., t. ix., 1880.
TyNDALL—Phil. Trans. Roy. Soc., London, 1877.

VaLLin—Ann. d’hyg., Paris, 2 s., t. xlviii., p. 271, 1877.
Voypau u. HEYMANN—Wien. med. Presse, 1875-76.

WANKLYN~— Brit. med. Journ., vol. ii., 1873.

3 Pharm, Journ, and Trans., 3 s., vol. iv., pp. 205-13, 1874.
WERNCKE—Dissert. Dorpat, 1879.
WERNICH—Archiv f. pathol, anat., Bd. Ixxviii., p. 51, 1879.

5a Desinfectionslehre z. prakt. Gebrauch auf kritischer und experi-
menteller Grundlage, 2d edition, Wien, 1882.
555 Nature, vol. xii., p. 311, 1879.

WERNITZ, IwaN—Ueber die Wirkung der Antiseptica auf ungeformte Fermente,
Dorpat, 1880.
WILLIAMS—Physician and Surg., Balt., vol. v., p. 4, 1833.

LITERATURE. 139

WoLFrHttGEL—Mittheil. aus d. k. Gesundheitsamte, Bd. i., p. 188, Berlin, 1881.
WOSENESSENSKI—Compt. rend. Acad. d.sc., Paris, t. xcviii., p. 314, 1884.

ZWEIFEL—Ztschr. f. physiol. Chem., Strassburg, Bd. vi., p. 386, 1882.

CHOLERA.

BIANCHI, A.—Lancet, vol. ii., p. 706, 1884.
Bucuner, H.—Aerztl. Int.-Bl., Miinchen, p. 549, 1884.

CaMERON, C.—Brit. Med. Journ., vol. i., pp. 233-325, 1884.

Carrer, H. V.—Lancet, vol. ii., p. 305, 1884.

CUNNINGHAM—On the Development of certain Micro-Organisms occurring in .the
Intest. Canal, Rep. San. Com. India, vol. xv., p. 117, Calcutta, 1880.

ERMENGEIN, VAN—Bull. Soc. belge de micr., Brux., Oct. 26, 1884.

Hassatt, A. H.—Relation of Epidemic Cholera of 1854-1855.

Rep. on the Micros. Exam. of the Blood, and Excretions of
Cholera Patients, 1855.

Hunter, Sir W. G.—Brit. Med. Journ., vol. i., 1884.

JouNeE—Deutsche Ztschr. f. Thiermed., Bd. xi., p. 87, 1885.

Kiein—Brit. Med. Journ., vol. i., 1885.
sa Lancet, vol. ii., p. 285, 1884.
Fe Lbid., vol. i., 1885.

33 Proc. Roy. Soc., London, vol. xxxviii., 1885.
Kocu, R.—Brit. Med. Journ., vol. i., pp. 375, 568, 740, 1884.
4 Deutsche med. Wchnschr., Berlin, Bd. x., 1884.

a Deutscher Reichs Anzeiger, Oct. 13, 1883.
en Lancet, vol. ii., pp. 249, 292, 1884.

Macnamara, C.—Brit. Med. Journ., vol. i., p. 502, 1884.
NoTHNAGEL—Ztschr. f. klin. Med., Berlin, 1881.

PETTENKOFER—Lancet, vol. ii., pp. 769, 816, 861, 904, 992, 1042, 1086, 1884.
Z. Aitiol. der Infectionskrankheiten, 1881.

”

Rainy—Appendix to Rep. of Com. for Scientific Inquiry, Cholera Epidemic,
1854-1855.

Straus—Brit. Med. Journ., vol. i.. p. 359, 1884.
Straus, Rousx, THUILLIER, et NocarD—Compt. rend. Soc. de biol., Paris,

7s. t. iv., 1883.

ToMMASI-CRUDELI—Lancet, vol. ii., p. 80, 1884.

COLOURED BACTERIA.

BERGNIER—St. Petersb. med. Ztschr., Bd. xiv., 1868.
BERGONZINI—Ann. Soc. Nat., Modena, t. xiv., p. 149, 1880.

140 APPENDIX.

CAPITAN et CHARRIN—Compt. rend. Soc. de biol., Paris, 75., t. iii, p. 861, 1882.
CHEYNE, W.—Laboratory Guide (Health Exhibition Handbook), London, 1884.
Coun—Beitr. z. Biol. d. Pflanz., Breslau, Bd. iii.

EsertTH—Archiv f. pathol. anat., Bd. Ixii., p. 504, 1875.
» Centralbl. f. d. med. Wissensch., Berlin, Bd. xi., p. 307, 1873

FrANK—Beitr. z. Biol. d. Pflanz., Breslau, vol. iii., p. 181.
GEssARD—Compt. rend. Acad. d. sc., Paris, t. xciv., p. 536, 1882.
KLEIN—Quart. Journ. Micr. Sc., Lond., n. »., vol. xxiii., 1883.
LASSAR—Arch. f. d. ges. physiol., Bonn, Bd. xxi., p. 104, 1880.
MIFLET—Beitr. z. Biol. d. Pflanz., Breslau, Bd. iii., p. 128,

NEELSEN, F,—Beitr. z. Biol. d. Pflanz., Breslau, Bd. iii., p. 187.
Ray-LANKESTER—Quart. Journ. Micr. Sc., Lond., n. s.; vol, xiii., 1873.

SCHNETZLER—Bull. Soc. vaudoise d. sc. nat., t. xviii, p. 117, 1882.
Scur6TeER—Beitr. z. Biol. d. Pflanz., Breslau, Bd. i., heft ii., p. 109, 1870.

TIEGHEM, VAN—Bull. Soc. bot. Fr., t. xxvii., p. 174, 1880.
TuiIn—Proc. Roy. Soc., London, vol. xxxi., p. 503, 1881.

Urticus—Arch, f. klin. Chir., Berlin, Bd. xxiv., p. 303, 1879.
See also GOODSIR’S Papers on Sarcina,

DIPHTHERIA.
BriEGER—Ztschr. f. klin. Med., Berlin, Bd. iii, 1880.

Coun—Beitr. z. Biol. d. Pflanz., Breslau, Bd. i. and ii., 1872-73.
CoRNEVIN, C.—J. de méd, vét et zootech., Lyon, t. xxx., p. 104, 1879.

EsErRTH—Cor.-Bl. f. schweiz. Aerzte, Basel, 1872.
5 Zur kenntniss d. bacter My., Wien, 1872.
Everett, J. T.—Med. and Surg. Reporter, Phila., 1881.

Hariry—Trans. Path. Soc., London, vol. x., p. 315, 1859.
HeEvuBNER—Die exper. Diphtherie, Leipzig, 1883.
HUTER u. TOMMAsI—Centralbl. f. d. med. Wissensch., Berlin, Bd. vi., 1868.

Kiegs—aArch. f. exper. Path. u. Pharmakol., Leipzig, Bd. iv., 1875.
- Cor.-Bl. f. Schweiz. Aerzte, Basel, 1871.
55 Real-Enkyclop. d. ges. Heilkunde, Wien, 1881.

LEBERT—Ziemssen’s Handb. der acuten Infectionskr., vol. i., p. 255.
LetzeRicH—Archiv f. pathol. anat., Bd. lxviii., 1873.
LOFFLER—Mittheil, aus d. k. Gesundheitsamte, Bd. ii., Berlin, 1884.

LITERATURE. I41

NassiLory—Archiv f. pathol. anat., Bd. 1., p. 550, 1870.
NicaTi—Compt. rend. Acad. d. sc., Paris, t. Ixxxviii., p. 297, 1879.

OERTEL—Deutsches arch. f. klin. Med., Leipzig, Bd. viii., 1871.
vs Ziemssen’s Cyclop., vol. ii.
oe Zur Aetiologie d. Infectionskrankheiten, Miinchen, 1881.

SALISBURY, J. H.—Gaillard’s M. J., N. Y., vol. Ixxxiii., p. 4o1, 1882.
SATTERTHWAITE and Curtis—Report Board of Health, N. Y., 1877.
SENATOR—Berl. klin. Wchnschr., Bd. ix., 1872.

4 Volkmann’s Sammlung klin. Vortrage, No. 78, 1874.

TALAMON, C.—Bull. Soc. anat. de Paris, t. lvi., p. 44, 1881.
TRENDENLENBERG—Arch. f. klin. Chir., Berlin, Bd. x.

Woop and Formap—Nat. Bd. Health Bull., Wash., 1880.

DISEASES OF ANIMALS.
SwinE PLacuE, GLANDERS, PLEURO-PNEUMONIA, &c.

Biock—Ueber Pilzbildung in thierischen Geweben. Diss. Stettin, 1871.
BoucHARD, CAPITAN, et CHARVIN—Rev. méd. frangaise, Decr. 30th, 1882.
Boutey—Bull. Acad. de méd., Paris, 2 s., t. x., pp. 1086, 1190, 1881.
35 Rec. de méd. vét., Paris, 6s., t. vili., p. 1031, 1881.
is Lbid,, 6 s., t. ix., p. 161, 1882,
BRUYLANTS et VERRIERS—Bull. Acad. roy. de méd. de Belg., Brux., 3 s., t. xiv.,
Pp. 540, 1880,
BucHNER—Sitzungsb. d. k.-bayer. Akad. d. Wissensch. zu Miinchen, 1882.
35 Lbid., p. 368, 1880.

CoHNHEIM— Archiv f. pathol. anat., Bd. xxxiii., 1865.
ExserTH—Fortschritte d. medicin, Bd. iii., 1885.

FRIEDREICH—Archiv f. pathol. anat., Bd. xi., 1857.
FURBRINGER—Archiy f. pathol. anat., Bd. Ixxvi., 1879.

GaFFKyY—Mittheil. aus d. k. Gesundheitsamte, Bd. i., Berlin, 1881.
Grawitz—Archiv f. pathol. anat., Bd. Ixx., 1877.

5% Lbid., Bd. Ixxxi., 1880.

53 Berl. klin. Wehnschr., 1881.
Groue—Berl. klin. Wehnschr., 1871.

Kitt—Deutsche Ztschr. f. Thiermed., Bd. vii., 1881.

KiE1n—Archiv f, pathol. anat., Bd. xcv., p. 468, 1884.
os Journ. of Physiology, vol. v.

Kocu—Berl. klin. Wchnschr., 1881.

KRANNHALS—St. Petersb. med. Wchnschr., 1881.

LesBLANC—Bull. Acad. de méd., Paris, 2 s., t. x., p. 1168.

142 APPENDIX.

LinGarD and BaTT— Lancet, vol. i., 1883.
LOFFLER—Mittheil. aus d. k. Gesundheitsamte, Bd. i., p. 134, Berlin, 1881.
Lustic—Jahresbr. d. k. Thierarzneisch. z. Hann., 1883-84, p. 45.

MAYRWIESER—Wchnechr. f. Thik. u. Viehz., No. 19, 1884.

NAGELI—Journ. Roy. Micr. Soc., London, 2 s., vol. ii., p. 382, 1882.
Sitzungsb. d. k.-bayer Akad. d. Wissensch. zu Miinchen, p. 147, 1882.

a

PASTEUR, CHAMBERLAUD, Roux, et THUILLIER—Compt. rend. Acad. d. sc.,
Paris, t. xcv., p. 1720, 1882.
PoELs u. NOLEN—Centralbl. f. d. med. Wissensch., Berlin, Bd. xxii., 1884.

RosENsSTEIN—Berl. klin. Wcehnschr., Berlin, 1867.
Roy—Rep. on the Path. Hist. of Epizootic Pleuro-Pneumonia, London, 1879.

ScHutz u. LOFFLER—Deutsche med. Wchnschr., Berlin, 1882.
33 Mittheil. aus d. k. Gecunaheitesnire, Bd. ii., Berlin, 1884.
SeMMER—Deutsche Ztschr. f. Thiermed., Bd. xi., p. 77.

WacGneER—Jahrb. f. Kinderheilkunde, 1868.
WASSILIEFF—Deutsche med. Wchnschr., Berlin, 1883.
WILLiaMs—Bull. Acad. roy. de méd. de Belg., Brux., 3s., t. xiv., pp. 249, 313,

1880.
5 Lbid., 35., t. xv., pp. 156, 584, 1881.
Se Ibid., 3.s.,t. xvi., p. 62, 1882.

Bull. Acad. de méd., Paris, 2 s., t. x., p. 1100, 1881.

”

ZENKER—Jahresb. d. Gesellsch. f. Nat.- u. Heilk. in Dresden, 1861-62.

ERYSIPELAS.

DupeyRAT—Recherches clinique et experimentales sur la pathogénie de l’érysipé'e,
Paris, 1881.

FEHLEISEN—Deutsche Ztschr. f. chir., Leipzig, Bd. xvi.
es Die Aetiologie d. Erysipels, Berlin, 1883.
Hier, A.—Berl. klin. Wchnschr., Bd. xi., 1874.

Ktiess—aArch. f. exper. Path. u. Pharmakol., Leipzig, Bd. iv., 1875:
Kocu—Traumatic Infective Diseases, translated, London, 1880.

LuxomsKy—Archiv f. pathol. anat., Bd. Ix., p. 418, 1874.
NEpveu—Gaz, méd. de Paris, 45., t. i., p. 32, 1872.
OrtH—Arch. f. exper. Path, u. Pharmakol., Leipzig, Bd. i., 1873.
RayNAUD— Union méd., Paris, 1873.

TILLMANNS—Arch, f. exper. Path. u. Pharmakol., Leipzig, Bd. xii., p. 225, 1880.
53 Arch. f. klin, Chir., Berlin, Bd. xxiii, 1880.
TROSIER—Bull. Soc. anat. de Paris, 1875.

LITERATURE. 143

FERMENTATION AND PUTREFACTION.
ANDERS—Deutsche Ztschr. f.chir., Leipzig, Bd. vii., 1876.

Bary, DE—Beitrage z. Morph. u. Phys. der Pilze, Frankfurt, 1864.
BasT1aN—Journal of the Linn. Soc. Zool., vol. xiv., 1875.
BEcHAMP—Compt. rend. Acad. d. sc., Paris, t. Ix. p. 445, 1865.
BERTHELOT—Compt. rend. Acad. d. sc., Paris, t. xliv., p. 702, 1857.
BLONDEAU—Journ. de Pharm., Bd. xii., pp. 244, 336, 1846.
BonorDEN—Abhandl. d. naturf. Gesellsch. zu Halle, 1864.
BonTRoux—Compt. rend. Acad. de sc., Paris, t. xcvii., p. 116, 1883.
BovuLtoumiz—Compt. rend. Acad. d. sc., Paris, t. Ixxx., p. 123, 1875.
BRACONNOT—Ann. de chim. et phys., Paris, t. xlvii.
BREFELD—Landwirthsch. Jahresb., Bd. iii., p. 1, 1874, Bd. iv., p. 405, 1875,
Bd. v., p. 306, 1876.
BRIEGER—Ztschr. f. physiol. Chem., Strassburg, Bd. viii., p. 306, 1884.
BROUAKDEL et BourmMy—Progrés méd., Paris, 1881.

CaiGnarD-LATouR—Ann, de chim. et phys., Paris, 2 s., t. Ixviii., p. 206,
CHICANDARD—Compt. rend. Acad. d. sc., Paris, t. xcvi., p. 1585, 1883.
Pf Lbid., t. xcvii., p. 616, 1883.

ClenKowsky—Melanges biol. Acad. imp. d. sc. de’St. Pétersb., Bd. viii.
CocHIn—Compt. rend. Acad. de sc., Paris, t. xcvi., p. 852, 1883.
Cotin—Ann. de chim. et phys., Paris, 2 s., t. xxviii., 1825.

ae Lbid., 2s., t. XXX., Pp. 42.

= Bull. Acad. de méd., Paris, 2s., t. iv., 1875.

DuBeL_t—Arch. f. exper. Path. u. Pharmakol., Leipzig, Bd. v., p. 195, 1876.
DuBRUNFAUT—Compt. rend. Acad. d. sc., Paris, t. Ixxiii., pp. 200, 263, 317, 1871,
DucLaux—Fermentation (Health Exhibition Handbook, London, 1884).

35 Ferments et Maladies, Paris, 1882.

5 Théses presentées 4 la faculté de Paris, 1865,
Dumas—Compt. rend. Acad. d. sc., Paris, t. Ixxv., p. 277, 1872.
DuvaL—Journ. de l’anat. et physiol., Paris, t. ix., 1873.

Exunina—Journ. f. prakt. Chem., Leipzig, n. s., Bd. xxi., 1880.
EXxNER—Sitzungsb. d. k, Akad. d. Wissensch., Wien, p. 363, 1870.

FaBroni—a<aAnn. de chim. et phys., Paris, t. xxxi., 1799.
FarrFIELD—Med. Rec., N. Y., 1877.
FELTZ u. RITTER—Journ. de l’anat. et physiol., Paris, t. x., 1874.
Fitz-—Berl. d..chem. Gesellsch., Bd. vi., p. 48, 1873.

», Lbid., Bd. x., p. 276, 1878.

» <Lbid., Bd. xi., pp. 42, 498, 1879.

» tbid., Bd. xii, p. 474, 1879.

» Lbid., Bd. xiii. p. 1309, 1880.
F.Ltcce—Handbuch der Hygiene: Part. I.—Fermente und Mikroparasiten,

Leipzig, 1882.

FriscH—Exp. Stud. ii. d. Verbreitung d. Faulnissorganismen, 1874.

Gay-Lussac—Ann. de chim. et phys., Paris, t. Ixxvi, 1810.

144 APPENDIX.

Grawitz—Archiv f. pathol. anat., Bd. Ixx., p. 546, 1877.
33 Ibid., Bd. 1xxxi., p. 355, 1880.
ig Lbid., Bd. Ixxxix., p 87, 1881.
GuBLER-—Compt. rend. Acad. d. sc., Paris, t. Ixxviii., p. 1054, 1874.

HaALLIER—Gi4hrungserscheinungen, Leipzig, 1867.
Hansen, E. C.—Contrib. to the knowledge of Organisms which live in Beer and
the Wort of Beer, 1879.

Harz—Grundziige d. alkoholischen Gahrungslehre, Miinchen, 1877.
HELMHOLTz—Journ. f. prakt. Chem., Leipzig, Bd. xxxi., p. 429, 1844.

5 Miiller’s Archiv, p. 453, 1843.
HEMMER—Wirkung faulender Stoffe, Miinchen, 1866.
H1LLER—Centralbl. f. d. med. Wissensch., Berlin, Pd. xii., 1874.

P Die Lehre von der Faulniss, Berlin, 1879.

Hocum—Med. Rec., N. Y., 1877.
HorrMann—Ann. des. sc. nat. bot., t. xiii., 1860.

s» , Botan. Unters. herausgegeben v. Karsten, Bd. i., 1866.

a Wien. med. Wchnschr., 1873.
HusBEer—Deutsches Arch. f. klin. Med., Leipzig, Bd. xxv., p. 220, 1880.
HueEprE—Mittheil. aus d. k. Gesundheitsamte, Bd. ii., Berlin, 1884.
HUFNER—Journ. fiir prakt. Chem., Leipzig, n. s., Bd. x., p. 148.

JEANNERET—Journ. f. prakt. Chem., Leipzig, n. s., Bd. xv., p. 353, 1877.

KarsTEN—Chemismus der Pflanzenzelle, Wien, 1869.
Ktrzinc—Journ. f. prakt. Chem., Leipzig, Bd. xi, p. 385.

LALLieR—Compt. rend. Acad. d. sc., Paris, t. 78, p. 361, 1874.
Lre—Med. Press and Circ., vol. ii., 1872.
LeErort—Bull. Acad. de méd., Paris, 2 5., t. iii, 1874.
LEMAIRE—Compt. rend. Acad. d. sc., Paris, t. lvii., p. 625, 1863.
35 Lbid., t. lix., pp. 317, 425, 1864.,
Lex—Centralbl. f. d. med. Wissensch., Berlin, Bd. x., pp. 291, 305, 513, 1872.
LIEBERMANN—Biol. Centralb., Erlangen, Bd. ii., p. 747, 1882.
Liesic—Ann. d. Pharm., Bd. xxx., p. 250.
iy Die Chemie in ihrer Anwendung auf Agricultur u. Physiol., Braun-
schweig, 1876.
$5 Ueber Gahrung, der Muskelkraft u. Ernahrung, Leipzig, 1870.
as Verhandl, d. Miinch, Akad. d. Wissensch., Bd. ix., 1861.
LisTER—Contrib. to the Germ Theory of Putrefaction and other Fermentative
Changes, and to the Natural History of Torule and Bacteria, Edin., 1875.
Ss Quart. Journ. Micr. Sc., Lond., n. s., vol. xiii, p. 380, 1873,
ae Lbid., n. s., vol. xviii., p. 177, 1878.
Ltprrsporrr—Poggendorff’s Annalen, Bd. lxvii., p. 408.

Marcano, V.—Compt. rend. Acad. d. sc., Paris, t. xcv., p. 345, 1882.
55 Lbid., t. xcvi., p. 1733, 1883.
MARCKEN—Ztschr. f. Spiritusindustrie, Bd. iv., p. 114, 1881.
MAYER— Manual of the Chemistry of Fermentations, Heidelberg, 1874.
MITSCHERLICH—Monatsber. d. Berl, Akad. d, Wissensch., p. 392, 1841.
FS Poggendorff’s Annalen, Bd. lv., p. 225, 1842.
Lbid., Bd. lix., p. 97, 1843.

7

LITERATURE. 145

MosLER—Archiv f. pathol. anat., Bd. xxix., p. 510, 1864.
MoussETTE—Compt. rend. Acad. d. sc., Paris, t. xcvi., p. 1865, 1883.
MuscuLus—Arch. f. d. ges. physiol., Bonn, Bd. xii., p. 214, 1876.

NAGELI—Abhandl. Bayer. Akad. Miinchen, t. xiii., part 2, pp. 75-205, 1879.
‘i Theorie der gahrung, 1879.

Nencki—Beitr. z, Biol. d. Spaltpilze, Leipzig, 1880.

NepveEu—Gaz. méd. de Paris, 1875.

PanumM—Archiv f. pathol. anat., Bd. Ix., p. 301, 1874.

i Nord. med. Ark., Stockholm, Bd. x., p. 4, 1878.
PascHuTIN—Archiv f. pathol. anat., Bd. lix., p. 470, 1874.
PasTEUR—Ann. de chim. et phys., Paris, 3s., t. lviti., p. 346, 1860.

5 Lbid., 3.s., t. Ixiv., 1862.

* Bull. Acad. de méd., Paris, 2 s., t. v., 1876.

s9 Compt. rend. Acad. d. sc., Paris, t. xlv., 1857.

43 Lbid., t. xlvi., 1858.

me Lbid., t. 1., 1860.

sa Lbid., t. lii., p. 344, 1861.

5 Ibid, t. vi., pp. 416, 989, 1109, 1863.

oi Lbid., t. \xxiii., p. 1419, 1871.

3 Lbid., t. Ixxv., p. 784, 1872.

9% Etude sur la biére, Paris, 1876.

a Etude sur le vin, Paris, 1866.

53 Studies on Fermentation, translated, London, 1879.
PASTEUR et JoUBERT—Compt. rend. Acad. d. sc., Paris, t. Ixxxiii., p. 5, 1876.
Pororr—Berl. klin. Wehnschr., 1872.

PouLreT—Gaz. hebd. de méd., Paris, 2 s., t. xii. p. 85, 1875.
PRAZMOWSKI—Bot. Zeit., Bd. xxxvii., pp. 409-424, 1879.
m0 Unters. fi. d. Entwickelungsgeschichte einiger Bacterienarten,
Leipzig, 1880.

ReEs—Botan. Unters. ii. die Alkoholgahrungspilze, Leipzig, 1870.
», Sitzgungsb. d. phys.-med. Soc. zu Erlangen, 1877.

RoBINn, Cu.—Des fermentations, Thése d’agrégation, 1847.
55 “Journ. de l'anat. et physiol., Paris, t. xi., p. 379, 1875.

SAINT-PIERRE—De la ferm. et de la putréf., Thése d’agrégation de Montpellier,
1860.

ScumiptT, C.—Ann. d. Chem. u. Pharm., Bd. ]xi., p. 168.

SCHONBEIN—Journ. f. prakt. Chem., Leipzig, Ixxxix., p. 323, 1863.

4 Verhandl. d. naturf. Gesellsch. in Basel, Bd. iv., p. 797.
5 Lbid., Bd. v., p. 1.

a Ztschr. f. Biol. Miinchen, Bd. i., p. 273, 1865,

i Jbid., Ba. iii., p. 140, 1867.

Jbid., Bd. iv., p. 367, 1868.
Lbid., Bd. vi., p. 467, 1870.
ScuUBERT—Poggendori’s Annalen, Bd. Ixix., p. 157.
» ~ dLbid., Bd. Ixxvii., p. 197.
ScHUTZENBERGER—Die Gahrungserscheinungen, 1876.
Les Fermentations, Paris, 1875.
K

146 APPENDIX,

Scuwann—Ann. d. Phys. u. Chem., Leipzig, Bd. xli., p. 184, 1837.
SCHWENINGER— Virchow u. Hirsch’s Jahresb., p. 194, 1866.

TIEGHEM, VAN—Bull. Soc. bot. Fr., t. xxvi., p. 25, 1880.
Compt. rend. Acad. d. sc., Paris, t. lviii., p. 218, 1864,
ToRee—Ann d. Chem. u. Pharm., Bd. xxiii, p. 100, 1839.
“is Compt. rend. Acad. d. sc., Paris, t. vii., 1838.
TYNDALL—Essays on the Floating Matter of the Air in relation to Putrefaction
and Infection, London, 1881.

VANDEVELDE—Ztschr. f. physiol. Chem., Strassburg, Bd. viii., p. 367, 1884.

WAGNER—Journ. f. prakt. Chem., Leipzig, Bd. xlv., p. 241, 1848.
WALcHLI—Journ. f. prakt. Chem., Leipzig, u. s., Bd. xxii., p. 71, 1878.

GENERAL.
ARNDT—Archiv f. pathol. anat., Bd. Ixxxii., p. 119, 1880.

BatL—Die wichtigsten Satze der neueren Mykol., Jena, 1861.
Bary, DE—Morphol. u. Physiol. der Pilze, &c., Bi. ii, Abth. 1, Leipzig, 1866.
Bary, DE, u. WoronIN—Beitr. zur Morphol. u. Phys. der Pilze, Frankf., 1870.
BiILLRoTH—Untersuch. iib. d. vegetations formen v. Coccobacteria septica, Berl.,
1874.
BoEHLENDORFF—Ein Beitr. z. Biol. einiger Schizomyceten, Dorpat, 1889.
BoONORDEN—Handb. der allgemeinen Mykologie, 1851.
BREFELD—Botanische untersuchungen iiber Schimmelpilze, heft 4, 1881.
45 Journ. de microg., Paris, t. ii, 1879.
BucHNER— Die Nageli’sche Theorie d. Infectionskrankh., Leipzig, 1877.

Coun—Beitr. z. Biol. d. Pflanz., Breslau, Bd. iii., 1879.
CIENKOWsSKY—Mem. Acad. imp. d. Sc. de St. Petersb., 1878.

DALLINGER—Proc. Roy. Inst. G. B., vol. viii., part 4, 1879.
6 Res. into the Origin and Development of Minute and Lowly Life
Forms, &c., London, 1877.

Erpam—Der gegenwart. Standp. der Mykologie, etc., Berlin, 1872.
ENGELMANN, F, W.—Arch. f. d. ges. physiol., Bonn, Bd. xxvi., p. 537, 1881.
Ewart and GEDDES—-Proc. Roy. Soc., London, vol. xxvii.

FRIEDLANDER, C.—Archiv f. pathol. anat., Bd. Ixxxvii., p. 319, 1882.

Gram—Fortschritte d. medicin, Bd. ii., 1884.
Groun—Arch. f. mikr. Anat., Bonn, Bd. viii., p. 514, 1872.

HALLIER—Arch. f. mikr. Anat., Bonn, Bd. ii., p. 67, 1866.

_ Die pflanzlichen Parasiten, Leipzig, 1866.
3% Parasitologische Unters., Leipzig, 1868,
re Phytopathologie, Leipzig, 1868,

HeENsen—Arch. f. mikr. Anat., Bonn, Bd. iii., 1867.
HILLER—Lehre v. d. Fiulniss, Berlin, 1879.
HorrMaNnN—Mykologische Berichte, Giessen, 1870-72.

LITERATURE. 147

KLEBs—Arch. f. exper. Path. u. Pharmakol., Leipzig, Bd. i., pp. 31, 443. 1873.
» Ibid. Bd. iii. p. 305, 1875.
ar Lbid., Bd. iv., pp. 107, 207, 409, 1875.
sa Lbid., Bd. v., p. 350, 1876.
se “* Ansteckende Krankh.” in Eulenburg’s Encyc.
59 Beitr. zur pathol, Anat. d. Schusswunden, Leipzig, 1872.

LepLaT et JAILILARD—Compt. rend. Acad. d. sc., Paris, t. lix., p. 250, 1864.
LetzertcH—Arch. f. exper. Path. u. Pharmakol., Leipzig, Bd. xii., p. 350, 1879.
Leunis—Synop. der Pflanzenkunde, Abth. 3, Hannover, 1877.

Ltpers—Arch. f. mikr. Anat., Bonn, Bd. iii., 1867.

Macnin—Les Bacteries, Paris, 1878.

MAGNIN and STERNBERG—Bacteria, with full Bibliography, N. Y., 1884.
MANAsSsEIN—Centralbl. f. d. med. Wissensch., Berlin, Bd. ix., p. 177, 1871.
Mayer, A.—Lehrb. d. Gahrungschemie, 2 aufl., 1876.

MiFLeT—Beitr. z. Biol. d. Pflanz., Breslau, Bd. iii., 1879.

NAGELI— Die niederen Pilze, Miinchen, 1877.
NeEncxki1—Contrib. to Life-history of Schizomycetes, Leipzig, 1880.

Ortu—Arch. f. wissensch. u. prakt. Thierh., Berlin, Bd, iii., pp. 1-32, 1877.

PFEFFER—Pflanzenphysiologie, Bd. ii., Leipzig, 1882.
PopE and LANKESTER—Proc. Roy. Soc., London, vol. xxi., p. 349, 1873.

RABENHORST—Kryptogamen-Flora, Bd. i., Leipzig, 1881.
ReINKE—Arch. f. d. ges. physiol., Bonn, Bd. xxiii., p. 434, 1880.
Rot u. Lex—Handb. d. Militér-Gesundheitsflege, Bd. i., 1872.

SARATIER—Des Bacteries, Strassburg, 1865.
Sacus—Lehrb. d. Botanik, Leipzig, 1874.
SCHNETZLER, J. B.—Bull. Soc. vaudoise d. sc. nat., t. xviii., p. 117, 1882.
ScHUTZENBERGER—Die Gahrungserscheinungen, 1876.
Journ. Roy. Micr. Soc., London, 2 s., vol. ii., p. 655, 1882.

Siena aNe Dic Fadenpilze, Wiesbaden, 1883.
‘SoyKa—Sitzungsb. d. k.-bayer. Akad. d. Wissensch. zu Miinchen, 1879.
STEUDENER—Volkmann’s Sammlung klin. Vortrage, Bd. xxxviii., 1872.
STRUCK—Mittheil. aus d. k. Gesundheitsamte, Bd. i. and ii., Berlin, 1881-84, and

numerous papers in various Journals.

Vircuow—Archiv f. pathol. anat., Bd. Ixxix., p. 1, 1880.
9 Die Fortsch. der kriegsheilkunde, Berlin, 1874.

Wa.pstTEIn—Archiv f. pathol. anat., Bd. Ixxvii., p. 34, 1879.

WARMING—Om nogle ved Danmarks Kyster lavende Bakterier, Kjobh., 1876.

WernicH—Archiv f. pathol. anat., Bd. Ixxvili., p. 51, 1879.

Beitr. z. Biol. der Pflanz., Breslau, Bd. iii., 1879.

Die Entwickelg. d. organ. Krankheitsgifte, Berlin, 1880.

Grundriss der Desinfectionslehre, Wien, 1880.

”
ce)

”

ZIEGLER—Text-Book of Pathological Anatomy, pt. i., General, cap. xxx., London,
1883.

148 APPENDIX.

GONORRHEA AND SYPHILIS.

AUFRECHT—Centralbl. f. d. med. Wissensch., Berlin, Bd. xix., 1881.
3 Lbid., Bd. xxi., 1883.

BoKAl u. FINKELSTEIN—Prag. med. chir. Presse, May 1880.
Bock HART—Sitzungusb. der phys.-med. Gesellsch. in Wiirzburg, Sept. 1882.

DonniE—Compt. rend. Acad. d. sc., Paris, t. iii., p. 385, 1836.
a Lbid., t. iv., p. 464, 1837.

KrysER—Maryland M. J., Baltimore, vol. ix., p. 481, 1882.
KLess—Arch, f. exper. Path. u. Pharmakol., Leipzig, Bd. «., p. 161, 1879.

MARCHIAFAVA, VON E.—Gazz. d. osp., Milano, t. iii., p. 163, 1882.
Morison—Maryland M. J., Baltimore, vol. ix., p. 385, 1882.
Fe Lbid., vol. x., p. 1, 1883.
Prag. med. Wchnschr., 1883.
Wien. med. Wchnschr., 1883.

Netsszr, A.—Deutsche med. Wchnschr. Berlin, Bd. viii., p- 279, 1882.
Centralbl. f. d. med. Wissensch., Berlin, Bd. xxi., 1883.

”

HYDROPHOBIA.

CoLttn—Bull. Acad. de méd., Paris, 2s., t. x., p. 694, 1881.

DoLréris—Gaz. méd. de Paris, 6 s., t. iii., p. 114, 1881.
Tribune méd., Paris, t. xiv., p. 63, 1881.

”

GtB1ER—Compt. rend.. Acad. d. sc., Paris, t. xcvi., p. 1701, 1883.

PasTEUR—Compt. rend. Acad. d. sc., Paris, t. xcii., p. 159, 1881.
CHAMBERLAND, Roux, et THUILLIER—Bull. Acad. de méd., Paris,
2s, t. xi, p. 1440, 1882,
And later Papers in the Compt. rend. Acad. d. sc., by MM. Gibier,
Pasteur, Chamberland, et Roux.

LEPROSY.

BaBbes—Arch. de physiol. norm. et path., 3 s., t. ii, p. 41, 1883.
Compt. rend. Acad. d. sc., Paris, t. xcvi., p, 1246, 1883.

od

Corni et SUCHARD—Ann. de dermat. et syph., Paris, 1881.

DamscH—Archiv f. pathol. anat., Bd. xcii., p. 20, 1883.
Centralbl. f. d. med. Wissensch., Berlin, Bd. xxi., 1883.

yy

GAUCHER et HILLAIRET—Progres méd., Paris, t. viii, p. 1039, 1880.

LITERATURE. 149
HANSEN—Archiv f. pathol. anat., Bd. xc., p. 542, 1882.
#5 Hosp.-Tid. Kjobenh., No. 32, 1883.
¥5 J. A.—Nord. med. Ark., Stockholm, Bd. xii, p. i., 1880.
si Quart. Journ. Micr. Sc., Lond., n. s., vol. xx., pp. 92, 102, 1880.
Hus, J. D.—Trans. Path. Soc., London, vol. xxxiv., p. 289, 1883.
Kaposi—Wien. med. Wchnschr., 1883.

NEINER—Breslau. aerztl. Ztschr., Bd. i., 1879.
Nrisser, A.—Archiv f. pathol. anat., Bd. Ixxxiv., p. 514, 1881.

VioaL—La lépre et son traitement, Paris, 1884.
Vosstus—Ber. ii. d. Ophth. in. Heidelb., 1884.

MALARIA.
Crri—Arch, f. exper. Path. u. Pharmakol., Leipzig, Bd. xv. u. xvi., 1882.
KeitscH—Arch. gén. de méd., Paris, 7s., t. v., 1880.
KLEBs u. TomMasI-—Arch. f. exper. Path. u. Pharmakol., Leipzig, Bd. xi., pp.
122, 311, 1879.
LAVERAN—Nature parasitaire des accidents de l’impaludisme, &c., Paris, 1881.
MarCHAND—Atchiv f. pathol. anat., Bd. Ixxxviii., p. 104, 1882.
MaRCHIAFAVA, E.—Salute, Genova, t. xiv., p. 225, 1879.
MARCHIAFAVA e CUBONI—Acad. d. Sircei, Jan. 2, 1881.
RICHARD, M.—Compt. rend. Acad. d. sc., Paris, t. xciv., p. 496, 1882.

STERNBERG, G. M.—Nat. Bd. Health Bull., Suppl., Wash., 1881.

TomMasiI-CRUDELI—Arch. f. exper. Path. u. Pharmakol., Leipzig, Bd. xii.,
p- 225, 1880.

ae Istituzioni di anat. Path., vol. i., Turin, 1882.
55 Le Malaria de Rome, Paris, 1881.
METHODS.

ALmQuist, E.—Hygiea, Stockholm, Bd. xlv., p. 226, 1883.

BrEFELD—Botanische untersuchungen ii Schimmelpilze, heft iv., 1881.
3 Verhandl. d. phys.-med. Gesellsch. in Wiirzburg, n. f., Bd. viii,
Pp- 43, 1875.
BurDON-SANDERSON—Rep. of the Med. Off. of the Privy Council, 1870.
CuEYNE, W.—Laboratory Work (Health Exhibition Handbook, London, 1884).

DucLaux—Fermentation (Health Exhibition Handbook, London, 1884).

150 APPENDIX.

¥LGGGE—Handbuch der Hygiene, Leipzig, 1882.

FRrEyY—Das Mikroskop. und die mikroskopische technik, Leipzig, 1883.
FRIEDLANDER—Microscopische Technik, Berlin, 1884.
FriscH—Ztschr. f. Mikr., Berlin, Bd. i, p. 119, 1878.

Gisses—Lancet, vol. ii., p. 183, 1882.
PP Practical Histology and Pathology, London, 1884.

HaurtT—Ztschr. f. Mikr., Berlin, Bd. i., p. 175, 1878.
HESCHL— Wien. med. Wchnschr., Bd. xxx., pp. 705, 789, 813, 1880.

KLeps—aArch. f. exper. Path. u. Pharmakol., Leipzig, Bd. i., p. 47, 1873-
KLEIN—Micro-Organisms and Disease, London, 1885.
KocH—Mittheil. aus d. k. Gesundheitsamte, Bd. i., ii, Berlin, 1881- 84.
ra Wundinfectionskrankheiten, p. 29, 1878.
a3 Beitr. z. Biol. d. Pflanz., Breslau, Bd. ii, heft 3.

LOFFLER u. SCHUTZ—Mittheil. aus d. k. Gesundheitsamte, Bd. ii., Berlin, 1884.
(In the volume other authors describe various methods.)

MurpPHy—lInfectious Diseases (Health Exhibition Handbook, London, 1884).

Pretrers—Berl. klin. Wehnschr., Bd. xxi., 1883.
Perri—Berl. klin. Wehnschr., Bd. xxi., 1883.
PrRioR—Berl. klin. Wehnschr., Bd. xxi., 1883.

Wricut—Archiv f. pathol. anat., Bd. Ixxxiv., p. 275, 1881.
ay Ber. iiber d. Sitz. der schleschischen, Ges. f. vaterl. path., Bd. i., p. 47.
WooDHEAD— Practical Pathology, p. 512, Edinburgh, 1885.

Z1GLER—Lehrbuch der allgem. u. spec. path. Anat., Bd. ii., Abth. 4, Jena, 1885.
See also Methods in various Papers.

MICRO-ORGANISMS IN AIR.
BuRDON-SANDERSON—Proc. Roy. Soc., London, 1876.
CuNNINGHAM—Rep. San. Com. India, Calcutta, 1872-1874.
DOWDESWELL-— Quart. Journ. Micr. Sc., Lond., n. s., vol. xviii., p. 83, 1878.
Hesse— Mittheil. aus d. k. Gesundheitsamte, Bd. ii., Berlin, 1884.

Mixkuicz—Arch. f. klin.-Chir., Berlin, Bd. xxii., 1878.

3 Compt. rend. Acad. d. sc., Paris, t. xci., p. 64, 1880.
MiqueL—Ann. d’hyg., Paris, 2s., t. ii, pp. 226, 333, 1879.
Annuaire de l’Observ. de Montsouris, 1877.

a Lbid., pp. 383, 513, 1880.

NAGEL! u. BUCHNER—Centralbl. f. d. med. Wissensch., Berlin, Bd. xx., p. 513,
1882.

LITERATURE. ISI
OLIvieR—Rev. scient., Paris, t. xxxi., p. 290, 1883.

PasTEUR—Ann. de chim. et phys., Paris, 3 s., t. liv., 1862.
0 Compt. rend. Acad. d. sc., Paris, t. lii., 1861.
EA Lbid., t. \vi., p. 734, 1863.
PoprpER—Oesterr. Ztschr. f. prakt. Heilk., Wien, Bd. xviii , 1872.

ScHuTz—Mittheil. aus d. k. Gesundheitsamte, Bd. ii., Berlin, 1884.
SMART—Germs, Dust, and Disease: Two Chapters in our Life History, Edin. =
1883.

TyNDALL—Brit. Med. Journ., vol. i., p. 95, 1877.
35 Essays on the Floating Matter of the Air in relation to Putrefaction and
Infection, London, 1881.
i Pop. Sc. Month., N. Y., vol. x., p. 641, 1877.

MICRO-ORGANISMS IN LIVING TISSUES.

BILtRotTH—Arch. f. klin. Chir., Berlin, Bd. xx., p. 432, 1877.
BucHNER—Aerztl. Int.-Bl., Miinchen, Bd. xxvii., 1880.
BuRDON-SANDERSON—Brit. Med. Journ., vol. i., 1878.

as Quart. Journ. Micr. Sc., Lond., n. s., vol. xi., 1871.

is 13th Rep. of the Med. Officer of the Privy Council, p. 63.

CAZENEUVE et Livon—Compt. rend. Acad. d. sc., Paris, t. Ixxxv., p. 571, 1877.
CHAauVvEAU—Compt. rend. Acad. d. sc., Paris, t. Ixxvi., p. 1092, 1873.

CHIENE and Ewart—Journ. Anat. and Physiol., London, vol. xii., p. 448, 1878.
CoLin—Presse vét., Paris, t. iii., 1883.

Firxet—Ann. Soc. med.-chir. de Liége, t. xviii., p. 248, 1879.
FriscH—Exp. ii. Faulniss-organismen in d. Geweben, Erlangen, 1874.

Gayon—Recherches sur les altérations spontanées des ceufs, p. 45. Paris, 1875,
3 Compt. rend. Acad. d. sc., Paris, t. Ixxvi., p. 1092, 1873.

Harz—Deutsche Ztschr. f. Thiermed., Leipzig, 1879.
HaussMANN—Archiv f. pathol. anat., Bd. Ixvii., p. 11, 1876.
Hauser—Centralbl. f. d. med. Wissensch., Berlin, Bd. xxii, p. 355, 1884.
HeENsEN—Arch. f. mikr. anat., Bonn, Bd. viii., p. 342, 1872.

Horstey and Morr—Journ. of Physiology, vol. iii., p. 188, 1880.

KoLaczEK—Centralbl. f. Chir., Leipzig, Bd. ii., p. 197, 1875.
Kovuko.L-YasnopoLtski—Arch. f. d. ges. physiol., Bonn, Bd. xii., p. 80, 1876.

Lrusr—Ztschr. f. klin. Med., Berlin, Bd. iii, p. 233, 1881.
Lewis—Quart. Journ. Micr. Sc., Lond., n. s., vol. xix., p. 109, 1879.
ListER—Quart. Journ. Micr. Sc., Lond., u. s., vol. xviii. p. 179, 1878.
Lipers—Arch. f. mikr. anat., Bonn, Bd. viii., p. 317, 1872.

Moss, E. L.—Rep. Brit. Ass. Adv. Sc., 49th Meeting, p. 416, 1879.

152 APPENDIX.
NENcKI! u. G1AcosA—Journ. f. prakt. Chem., Leipzig, n. s., vols. xix.-xx., 1879.

PascHUTIN—Archiv f. pathol. anat., Bd. lix., p. 490, 1874.
PasTEUR—Bull. Acad. de méd., Paris, 2s., t. iv., 1875.
‘5 Etude sur la bier¢, Paris, 1876.

RINDFLEISCH— Archiv f. pathol. anat., Bd. liv., p. 397, 1872.
Roperts— Brit. Med. Journ., vol. i., p. 625, 1881.

a5 Phil. Trans. Roy. Soc., London, 1874, p. 457.
RosENBACH—Deutsche Ztschr. f. Chir., Leipzig, Bd. xiii, p. 334, 1880.

SAMUEL—Arch. f. exper. Path. u. Pharmakol., Leipzig, Bd. i., 1873.

SERVEL—Compt. rend. Acad. d. sc., Paris, t. lxxix., p. 1270, 1874.

STERNBERG—Johns Hopkins Univ. stud. biol. lab., Balt., vol. ii, pp. 157-181.
3 pl.

T1eGEL—Archiv f. pathol. anat., Bd. Ix., p. 79, 1874.

ZauHN—Archiv f. pathol. anat., Bd. xcv., p. 401, 1884.

OSTEO-MYELITIS.

CoLLMANN—Bakterien im Organismus eines an einer grossen Verletzung am Ober-
schenkel verstorbenen zwanzigjahrigen Madchens, Gottingen, 1873.

DEMARQUAY—Union méd., Paris, 1871.
ExsEerTH—Archiv f. pathol. anat., Bd. Ixv., p. 341, 1875.
FRIEDLANDER—Fortschritte d. medicin, Bd. i., 1883.

STRUCK u. BECKER—Deutsche med. Wchnschr., Berlin, Bd. ix., 1883.

PNEUMONIA.
AFANASSIEW—Compt. rend. Soc. de biol., Paris, 7 s., t. v., 1884.
a3 Edinburgh Med. Journ., vel. xxx., p. 717, 1885.

Banti—Arch. gén. de méd., Paris, t. exlvi., p. 36, 1880.

EpertH—Deutsches Arch. f. klin. Med., Leipzig, Bd. xxviii., pp. 1-42.
EMMERICH—Fortschritte d. medicin, Bd. ii., p. 153, 1884.

FirKET—Ann. Soc. med.-chir. de Liége, 1884.
FRANKEL—Congres Med., Berlin, 1884.
FRIEDLANDER— Archiv f. pathol. anat., Bd. Ixxxvii., p. 349, 1882.

‘sp Deutsche med. Zeitung, April 24, 1884.

3 Fortschritte d. medicin, Bd. i., p. 471, 1883.

2 tbid., Bd. ii., p. 287, 1884.

3 u. FRoBENIUs—Fortschritte d. medicin, Bd. i., 1883

<3 ae Lbid., Bd. ii., p. 333, 1884.

LITERATURE, 153

GILes—Brit. Med. Journ., vol. ii., 1883.
GUNTHER—Sitsungsb. des vereins f. innere med., Berlin, 1882.

JoRrcensen—Berl., klin. Wchnschr., Bd. xxii., 1884.

KEHRER—Ueber den Soorpilz, 1883.
Kiers—Arch. f. exper. Path. u. Pharmakol., Leipzig, Bd. iv., p. 418, 1875.
Kocu—Mittheil. aus d. k. Gesundheitsamte, Bd. i., pp. 1-48, Berlin, 1881.

Leypen—Centralbl. f. klin. Med., Bd. iv., p. 161, 1883.
LicHTHEIM—Fortschritte d, medicin, Bd. ii., p. 78, 1884.

Macuire—Brit. Med. Journ., vol. ii, 1884.
MArRay—Wien. med. Presse, Nos. 23, 24, 1883.
MENDELSOHN—Ztschr. f. klin. Med., Berlin, Bd. vii., p. 206, 1884.

Nauwerck—Beitr. z. path. Anat. und Physiol. von Zieg, Jena, 1884.

PLATONOW—Inaug. Dissert. Diagnost. Bedeutung der Pneumococcen, Wiirzburg,
1884.
Portis u. NOLEN—Centralbl. f. d. med. Wissensch., Berlin, Bd. xxii., p. 133, 1884.

SALVIOLI u. ZASLEIN—Centralbl. f. d. med. Wissensch., Berlin, Bd. xxi., p. 721,
1883.
Ste—Compt rend. Acad. d. sc., Paris, 1884.
», Des maladies specifiques du Poumon, Paris, 1885.
SILBERMANN—Deutsches Arch. f. klin. Med., Leipzig, Bd. xxxiv., p. 334.

ZiEHL—Centralbl. f. d. med. Wissensch., Berlin, Bd. xxi., p. 433, 1883.
ss Lbid., Bd. xxii., p. 97, 1884.

PYAEMIA AND ALLIED CONDITIONS.

ANSTIE—Lancet, vol. i., p. 117, 1870.
ARLOING—Compt. rend. Acad. d. sc., Paris, t. xcviii., p. 1346, 1884.

BaBes—Compt. rend. Acad. d. sc., Paris, t. xcvii., p- 682, 1883.
ms Biol. Centralbl., Erlangen, Bd. ii., pp. 97-101, 1852.
BALFouR—Edinburgh Med. Journ., vol. xxiii., p. 311, 1877.
BARTHOLD—Pyzemische Metastasis Diss., Berlin, 1875.
BARWELL—Trans. Med. Chir. Soc., London, vol. lvii., 1874.
BasTIAN—Brit. Med. Journ., vol. i., p. 49, 1878.
BEALE—Disease Germs, London, 1872.
BécHamp—Arch. de physiol. norm. et path., 2s., t. «., pp. 28-62, 1882.
8 Bull. Acad. de méd., Paris, 2s., t. xi, p. 347, 1882.
i Compt. rend. Acad. d. sc., Paris, t. xcii., p. 142, 1881.
i Trans. Internat. Med. Cong. London, vol. i., p. 352, 1881.
Beck, M.—Rep. Med. Off. Local Gov. Board, 1879, pp. 207-358, 11 plates,
London, 1880.
BECK, GREENFIELD, M‘CaRTHY, and RALF—Report on Pyzemia, Septiczemia,
and Purulent Infection to the Pathological Soc. of London, 1879.

154 APPENDIX.

BenIER—Bull. Acad. de méd., Paris, 2 s., t. ii., p. 147, 1873.
BELLFIELD, W. T.—Med. Rec., N. Y., vol. xxiii., pp. 197-225, 1883.
BERGERON—Compt. rend. Acad. d. sc., Paris, t. Ixxx., p. 268, 1875.
BERGMANN—Das putride gift und Putride Intoxicat., Dorpat, 1866.

es Deutsche Ztschr. f. Chir., Leipzig, Bd. i., p. 376, 1872.

Pr u. SCHMIEDEBERG—Centralbl. f. d. med. Wissensch., Berlin, Bd. vi.,

p- 497, 1868.
Bert, Pavr—Compt. rend. Soc. de biol., Paris, 6 s., t. ii, 1875.

is Lbid., 6 s., t. v.. 1878.
“i Lbid., 7 %., t. ii, 1880.
BILLRoTH—Arch. f. klin. Chir., Berlin, Bd. vi., p. 372, 1865.
ae Tbid., Bd. ix., p. 52, 1868.
3 Lbid., Bd. xiii, p. 579, 1872.

BILLRoTH u. EnRLicH—Arch. f. klin, Chir., Berlin, Bd. xx., p. 403, 1877.
BircH-HirsCHFELD—Arch. d. Heilk., Leipzig, Bd. xiv., 1873.

3 Lbid., Bd. xvii., 1876.

“ Centralbl. f. d. med. Wissensch., Berlin, Bd. x., p. 826,1872.
i Lbid., Bd. xi., p. 609, 1873.

35 Schmidt’s Jahrb., Leipzig, Bd. clxvi., p. 169, 1875.

Unters. ti. Pyamie, Leipzig, 1873.

BLum—Arch. gén. de méd., Paris, 6s., t. xiii, p. 414, 1869.

», bid. 6s., t. xiv., p. 534, 1869.

5 Wid, 65s., t. xvi, p. 421, 1870.
BocHEFONTAINE—Bull. Acad. de méd., Paris, 2 s., t. ii, p. 512, 1873.
Bovu.ry—Bull. Acad. de méd., Paris, 2 s., t. ii., 1873.
BRADLEY—Lancet, vol. i, p. 768, 1876.
Bratpwoop and VACHER—Brit. Med. Journ., vol. i., 1882; with very full list

of Literature.

BRANTLECHT—Allg. Wien. med. Ztg., Bd. xxiii, 1878.
Breum, V.—Das Putride Gift und Putride Intoxicat., Dorpat, 1866.
BucHNER—iib. die Wirkungen d. Spaltpilze im lebenden Korper, Munich, 1881.
BuRDON-SANVDERSON—Brit. Med. Journ., vol. i., 1875.

a Med. News, London, vol. ii., pp. 75, 87, 103, 115, 123,
134, 147, 158, 172, 182, 1882, i

6 Quart. Journ. Micr. Sc., London, n. s., vol. xi., p. 323, 1871.

4 Trans. Path. Soc., London, vol. xxiii., p. 303, 1872.

CapcE—Brit. Med. Journ., vol. i., p. 502, 1876.

Cane—Lancet, vol. i., p. 822, 1875.

Cavary—St. George’s Hospital Reports, London, vol. vii., 1875.
CecH—Journ, f. prakt. Chem., Leipzig, n. s., Bd. xxii., p. 338, 1880.
CHAMPONNI“RE—Sur la fievre Traumatique, 1872.
CHAUFFARD—Gaz. hebd. de méd., Paris, 2 s., t. xi., p. 398, 1874.
CHAUVEAU—Ass. Franc. Congrés de Nantes, 1875.

Ss Compt. rend. Acad. d. sc., Paris, t. Ixxvi., p. 1092, 1873.
ay Lbid., t. xcii., p. 844, 1881.
_ Gaz. hebd. de méd., Paris, 2 s., t. xii., p. 581, 1875.
5 Gaz. d. hép., Paris, t. liv., p. 353, 1881.
CHEYNE, W.—Antiseptic Surgery, London, 1882.
‘sy Trans, Path. Soc., London, vol. xxx., p. 571, 1879.

3 Lbid., vol. xxxv., p. 408, 1884,

LITERATURE. 153

Coun—Beitr. z. Biol. d. Pflanz., Breslau, Bd. i., heft ii, p. 127, 1872.

ois Lbid., Bd. i., heft iii., p. 141, 1875.

Ff Lbid., Bd. ii., heft ii., p. 249, 1876.

or Nov. act. Acad. nat. curios, t. xxiv., 1853.
CoHNHEIM—Med. News and Abstr., Phila., vol. xl., pp. 62-64, 1882.
CoLiIn—Bull. Acad. de méd., Paris, 2 s., t. ii., 1873.

- Lbid., 2s., t. iv., 1875.

59 Lbid., 2s., t. vii., 1878.

33 Lbid., 2s., t. viii, 1879.

or Lbid., 2s., t. x., 1881.

Compt. yeu Acad. d. sc., Paris, t. xcvi., p. 1679, 1883.

CouLMANN v. SCHALTENBURG—Inang. Diss. Gottingen.
Corni et Bapes—Arch, de physiol. norm. et path., 3s., t. ii, p. 229, 1883.
CouNCcILMAN—Archiv f. pathol. anat., Bd. xcii., p. 217, 1883.
Coze et Frttz—Recherches expérimentales, &c., Strassburg, 1866.
CrookE—Guy’s Hosp. Gaz., London, n. s., vol. iii., 1878.

Daty—Lancet, vol. i., pp. 266, 470, 677, 1875.
DAvaINE—Bull. Acad. de méd., Paris, 2s., t. i., 1872.
a Lbid., 2 s., t. viii., 1879.
5 Compt. rend. Soc. de biol., Paris, 6 s., t. i., 1874.
De RaNnsE—Gaz. méd. de Paris, 1868.
3% Lbid., 1869.
$5 Lbid., 1870.
Despriks—Arch. gén. de méd., Paris, 6 s., t. xxiv., p. 256, 1874.
DoLtscHENKOw—Centralbl. f. d. med. Wissensch., Berlin, Bd. xi., pp. 657, 673,
1873.
Donec—Pyzemié sans Blessé, Thése, 1877.
Donovan—Doublin Journ. Med. Sc., vol. 1x., 1875.
DOoWDESWELL —Proc. Roy. Soc., London, vol. xxxiv., p. 449, 1883.
5 Quart. Journ. Micr. Sc., Lond., n. »., vol. xviii., p. 82, 1878.
5 Jbid., n. s., vol. xxii., p. 66, 1882.
DRESCHFELD—Brit. Med. Journ., vol. ii., 1883.
DreyeR—Atch. f. exper. Path. u. Pharmakol., Leipzig, Bd. ii., p. 149, 1874.
DrysDALE—Pyrexia, London, 1880.

EpertH—Archiv f. pathol. anat., Bd. lvii., p. 228, 1873.
an Lbid., Bd. \xxvii., p. 29, 1879.
Archiv f. pathol. anat, Bd. Ixxx., p. 311, 1880.
Centralbl. f. d. med. Wissensch., Berlin, Bd. xi., pp. 113, 291, 1873.
3 Zur Kenntniss der bacterischen Mykosen, Leipzig, 1872.
ERICcHSEN—Brit. Med. Journ., vol. i., p. 236, 1874.
+5 Tbid., vol. ii., p. 493, 1874.
Ewart—Proc. Roy. Soc., London, vol. xxxii., p. 492, 1881.

”

”

FELTz, v.—Compt. rend. Acad. d. sc., Paris, t. Ixxvi., p. 1360, 1873.
5 Ibid, t. \xxix., p. 1268, 1874.
35 Tbid., t. 1Xxx., p. 553, 1875.
Ss. Zbid., t. lxxxiv., p. 789, 1877.
Finxk—Aerztl. Int.-Bl., Miinchen, Bd. xx., 1873.
Fiscuer, H.—Centralbl. f. d. med. Wissensch., Berlin, Bd. vi., p. 659, 1868.

156 ‘ APPENDIX.

Fort—Gaz. méd. de Paris, 1871.
FresE—Das Putride Gift und Putride Intoxicat., Dorpat, 1866-72.
FROSCHAUER, V.—Wien. med. Presse, Bd. xxiii., pp. 305, 367, 1882.

GarFKy—Mittheil. aus d. k. Gesundheitsamte, Bd. i., Berlin, 1881.
GREVELER—Centralbl. f. d. med. Wissensch., Berlin, Bd. x., p. 769, 1872.
Gutrin—Compt. rend. Acad. d. sc., Paris, t. lxxviii., p. 782, 1874.

55 Jbid., t. Ixxx., p. 81, 189%,

8 Etude sur 1’ Tatexicatiod Purulente, comprenant cing discours prononcés

4 l’Académie de Médecine, Paris, 1879.
GUTERBOCK—Essai physiologique sur le pus, &c, 1838.
Gurrmann, W.—Experimenteller Beitrag zur Lehre von der putriden Intoxication
“und Septicemia, Dorpat, 1879.

HaLirer—Ztschr. f. Parasitenk., Jena, Bd. ii., heft iii., 1869.
Ha.tstepr—Med. and Surg. Reporter, Philadelphia, vol. xxxvii., 1875.
HaussMANN—Archiv f. pathol. anat., Bd. Ixvii., p. 11, 1876.
5 Berl. klin. Wchnschr., Bd. xiv., 1877.

HavemM—Bull. Acad. de méd., Paris, 2s., t. i., 1872.

35 Ibid., 2s., t. ii, 1873.

53 Compt. rend. Soc. de biol., Paris, 1872.

35 Gaz. hebd. de méd., Paris, 2 s., t. viii., p. 291, 1871.
HeEIBERG—Archiv f. pathol. anat., Bd. lvi., p. 407, 1872.

* Centralbl. f. d. med. Wissensch., Berlin, Bd. xii., p. 561, 1874.

Die puerperalen u. pyemischen Processe, Leipzig, 1873.

awe Hat Med, Journ., vol. i., 1874.
HILLER—Atch. f. klin. Chir., Berlin, Bd. xviii., p. 667, 1875.

oe Centralbl. f. Chir., Leipzig, Bd. i., 1874.

ss Lbid., Ba. iii., 1876. ;

‘3 Centralbl. f. d. med. Wissensch., Bd. xii., pp. 323, 337, 353» 309, 1874.
HorsLey—Rep. Med. Off. Local Gov. Board, with full list of Literature, pp.

239-86, 1881.

5 Trans. Path. Soc., London, vol. xxxiv., p. 298, 1883.
Huser—Deutsches Arch. f. klin. Med., Leipzig, Bd. xxv., p. 220.

ie PITHA u. BILLROTH’s Chirurgie, Bd. I., Abth. ii., heft i.
HvEter, C.—Allgem. Chirurgie, Leipzig, 1873.

IsraEL—Archiv f. pathol. anat., Bd. Ixxiv., p. 15, 1878.
= Berl. klin. Wchnschr., Bd. xv., 1878.

JEANNEL—Sur I’'Infection purulent ou Pyohémie, Paris, 1880.
Jessop—Med. Times and Gazette, vol. ii, p. 254, 1873.

KAUFMANN—Journ, f. prakt. Chem., Leipzig, n.s., Bd. xvii., p. 71, 1878.
KeHrer—Arch. f. exper. Path. u. Pharmakol., Leipzig, Bd. ii., p. 33, 1874.
KINGZETT—Journ. Chem. Soc., London, vol. xxxvii., p. 15, 1880.
K ess—Arch. f. exper. Path. u. Pharmakol., Leipzig, Bd. i., pp. 31, 443, 1873.
» 4bid., Bd. iii., p. 305, 1875.
» Lbid., Bd. iv., pp. 107, 207, 409, 1875.
» bid. Bd. v., p. 350, 1876.
» Abid., Bd. x., p. 222, 1879.
», Beitr. z, path. Anat, d. Schusswunden, Leipzig, 1872.

LITERATURE. 157

KLEeBs—Centralbl. f. d. med. Wissensch., Berlin, Bd. vi., p. 417, 1868.
KLEIN—Rep. Med. Off. Local Gov. Board (1881), pp. 166-206, London, 1882.
Kocu—Beitr. z. Biol. d. Pflanz., Breslau, Bd. ii., heft iii., 1876.

9 Mittheil. aus d. k. Gesundheitsamte, Bd. i., pp. 1-48, Berlin, 1881.

‘A Traumatic Infective Diseases, translated, London, 1880.
Unters. ii. d. Aetiol. d. Wundinfectionskrankheiten, Leipzig, 1878.

”

LaporpE—Gaz. méd. de Paris, 1874.
LacassaGNE—De la putridité morbide et de la septicemie, Paris, 1872.
Lanpau—Arch. f. klin. Chir., Berlin, Bd. xvii., p. 527, 1874.

Be Verhand]. d. deutsch. Gesellsch. f. Chir., Bd. ii, p. 193, 1874.
LEBER—Centralbl. f. d. med. Wissensch., Berlin, Bd. xi., p. 129, 1873.
LEtzeRicH—Arch. f. exper. Path. u. Pharmakol., Leipzig, Bd. vii., p. 223, 1877.

a5 Archiv f. pathol. anat., Bd. Ixviii., p. 519, 1876.

Lex—Centralbl. f. d. med. Wissensch., Berlin, Bd. x., pp. 291, 305, 513, 1872.
LisTER—Lancet, vol. ii., pp. 95, 353, 668, 1867.
Med. Times and Gazette, vol. ii., p. 684, 1877.
Quart. Journ. Micr. Sc., Lond., n.»., vol. xiii., p. 380-408, 1873.
Lbid., n. »., vol. xviii, p. 177, 1878.

35 Jbid., n. s., vol. xxi., p. 330-42, 1881.
Livon—Compt. rend. Soc. de. biol., Paris, 6 s., t. iv., p. 355, 1877.
Gaz. méd. de Paris, 1877.

”
”

”

MACLAREN—Glasgow Med. Journ., n.s., vol. iii., p. 524, 1871.
MAISSONNEUVE— Union méd., Paris, 1869.

Martini—Arch. f. klin. Chir., Berlin, Bd. xvi., p. 157, 1873.
MEISSNER—Deutsche Ztschr. f. Chir., Leipzig, Bd. xiii., 1881.
MENTZEL— Wien. med. Wchnschr., Bd. xix., 1869.

MikuLicz—Arch. f. klin. Chir., Berlin, Bd. xxii., p. 253, 1878.
Morris—Med. Times and Gazette, vol. i., p. 261, 1874.

Moss, E. L.—Rep. Brit. Ass, Adv. Sc., 49th Meeting, p. 416, 1879.
Moxon and GooDHAaRT—Guy’s Hospital Rep., 3 s., vol. xx., p. 229, 1879.
MULLER—Experiment studien, Miinchen, 1867. -

NAGELI—Abstract in Quart. Journ. Roy. Micr. Soc., 2 s., vol. ii., p. 382, 1882.
Die niederen Pilze in ihren Beziehungen zu den Infektionskrankheiten
und der Gesundheitspflege, Miinich, 1877.
33 Sitzungsb. d. k.-bayer. Akad. Wissensch., Miinchen, Bd. xii., 1882.
NassILorF—Archiv f. pathol. anat., Bd. 1., p. 550, 1870.
Naunyn—Berl. klin. Wehnschr., Bd. xx., p. 346, 1883.
NusspauM—Arch. f. klin. Chir., Berlin, Bd. xviii., p. 706, 1875.

”

OrrRTEL—Zur Aetiol. der Infektionskrankheiten, 1881.

Ocston—Brit. Med. Journ., vol. i., p. 369, 1881.

“Onrmus—Bull. Acad. de méd., Paris, 2s., t. ii., pp. 300, 457, 464, 1873.
OrtH—Arch, d. Heilk., Leipizig, Bd. xiii., p. 265, 1872.

Archiv f. pathol. anat., Bd. lviii., p. 437, 1873.

Ibid., Ba. lix., p. 532, 1874.

Arch. f. wissensch. u. prakt. Thierh., Berlin, Bd. iii., pp. 1-32, 1877.
Berl. klin. Wchnschr., Bd. ix., p. 402, 1872.

OsLER u. SCHAFER—Centralbl. f. d. see Wissensch., Berlin, Bd. xi., 1873.

158 APPENDIX.

PanumM—Atchiv f. pathol. anat., Bd. Ix., p. 328, 1874.
Passer—Fortschritte d. medicin, Bd. iii., 1885.
PasTEUR—Bull. Acad. de méd., Paris, 2 s., t. ix., p. 435, 1880.
3 Compt. rend. Acad. d. sc., Paris, t. lvi., p. 1189, 1863.
i Ibid., t. \xxxv., p. 101, 1877.
53 Lbid., t. Ixxxvii., p. 105, 1878,
PayNE—Trans. Path. Soc., London, vol. xxii., 1871.
Peasopy, J. L.—Med. Rec., N. Y., vol. xv., p. 306, 1879.
PERRET—JDe la septicémie, Paris, 1880.
PrszkKE—Exper. Beitr. u. Wundfieber, Breslau, 1872.
PETERSSEN—Diss. ii. das putride Gift, &c., Dorpat, 1866.
Pipoux—Gaz. hebd. de méd., Paris, 2s., t. xi., pp. 398, 428, 442, 1874.
5 Union méd., Paris, 1871.
PrazMowski—Unters. ii. d. Entwickelungs. u. Fermentwirkung e. Bacterienarten,
Leipzig, 1879.
Puxy—Archiv f. pathol. anat:, Bd. Ixix., p. 329, 1877.
PurnaM—Med. Rec., N. Y., 1872.

Raison, V.—Zur Kennt. d. putrid. Intoxication, &c., Dorpat, 1866.
RanKE—Deutsche Ztschr. f. Chir., Leipzig, Bd. vii., p. 63, 1876.
RavitscH—Zur Lehre von der putriden Infection, &c., Berlin, 1872.
Raynaup—Bull. Acad. de méd., Paris, 2s., t. «., p. 148, 1881.

55 Gaz. hebd. de méd., Paris, 2s., t. x., p. 210, 1873.
RECKLINGHAUSEN—Verhandl. d. phys.-med. Gesellsch. in Wiirz.,n. »., Bd. iv., 1871.
RicHarDson—Brit. Med. Journ., vol. i, p. 511, 1875.

RINDFLEIScH—Atchiv f. pathol. anat., Bd. liv., pp. 108, 396, 1872.
ne Lehrb. d. patholog. Gewebelehre, 1866.
Ropet, A.—Contribution 4 l’étude expérimentale de charbon bacteridien, 1881.

a Compt. rend. Acad. d. sc., Paris, t. xciv., p. 1060, 1882,
Ro.orr—Virchow ii. Hirsch’s Jahresbericht, Bd. i., p. 599, 1873.
RosENBACH—Mikro-organismen bei den Wund-Infectionskrankheiten des Men-

schen, Wiesbaden, 1884.

Roser—Arch. d. Heilk., Leipzig, Bd. vi., p. 252, 1866.
35 Verhandl. d. deutsch. Gesellsch. f. Chir., Bd. i., 1872.
RodszauEcy1, A.—Practitioner, London, vol. xxviii., pp. 152, 160, 227, 236, 1882.

SALTZMANN—Septikamie, Helsingfors.
SAPALSKI—Verhandl. d. phys.-med. Gesellsch, in Wiirz., n.s., Bd. iii, p. 142.
Savory—St. Barth. Hosp. Rep., London, vol. i., p. 107, 1865.
ScuHMIDT—Diss. ii. das putride Gift, &c., Dorpat, 1866.
i Unter. u. d. Sepsin, Dorpat, 1869. |
ScuMITz—Diss. ii. das putride Gilt, &c., Dorpat, 1866-1872.
ScuULLER—Deutsche Ztschr. f. Chir., Leipzig, Bd. vi., p. 144, 1875.
SeDILLoOT—De !’infection purulente ou pyohémie, Paris, 1849.
SEMMER—Archiv f. pathol. anat., Bd. Ixx., p. 371, 1877.
A Ibid., Bd. \xxxtii., 1881,

SocoLorr—Archiv f. pathol. anat., Bd. Ixvi., p. 171, 1876.
STARCKE—U. Polyarthritica Septica.
STERNBERG, G. M.—Am. Journ. Med. Sc., Phila., vol. Ixxxiv., p. 69-76, 1882.
Johns Hopkins Univ. stud. biol. lab., Balt., vol. ii,

pp. 183-200, 1 pl., 1882,

LITERATURE. 159

STERNBERG, G. M.—Nat. Bd. Health Bull., Wash., vol. ii, p. 781.
STEVENs—Glasgow Med. Journ., vol. xxii., p. 161, 1884.
SticH—Ann. d. char.-Krankenh. . . . . zu Berlin, Bd. iii., 1852.
STRANGE—Brit. Med. Journ., vol. ii., 183.

STROMEYER—Arch. f. Ophth., Berlin, Bd. xix., 1872.
SuTron—Trans. Path. Soc., London, vol. xxxiv., p. 323, 1883.

TEDENAT, E.—Etude critique sur la septicémie, etc., Paris, 1879.
TERRILLON—Arch. gén. de méd., Paris, 6s., t. xxiii., p. 159, 1874.
TEsTUT—Virchow ii. Hirsch’s Jabresbericht, Bd. ii., p. 336, 1873.
TIEGEL, E.—Archiv f. pathol. anat., Bd. Ix., p. 453, 1874.

5 U. die fiebererregenden Eigenschaften des Microsporon septicum,

Bern, 1871.
TILLMANNS—Verhandl. d. deutsch. Gesellsch. f. Chir., Bd. vii., p. 211, 1878.
Tizzon1—Arch. per Je sc. med., Torino, 1880.
3 Lbid., 1881.

ToussaiInt—Compt. rend. Acad. de sc., Paris, t. xci., p. 301, 1880.
TRAUBE u. GSCHEIDLEN—Berl. klin. Wchnschr., Bd. xi., 1874.
TYNDALL—Essays on the Floating Matter of the Air in relation to Putrefaction

and Infection, London, 1881.

VACQUERET— Pyzmie, Thése, 1875.
VERNEUIL—Bull. Acad. de méd., Paris, 2s., t. i, 1872.
Voct—Centralbl. f. d. med. Wissensch., Berlin, Bd. x., p. 690, 1872.
VuLPian—Bull. Acad. de méd., Paris, 2 s., t. ii., p. 380, 1873.

55 Gaz. hebd. de méd., Paris, 2 s., t. ix., p. 826, 1872.

WALDEVER—Arch. f. Gyneek., Berlin, Bd. iii., p. 293, 1872.

WEIDENBAUM— Diss. ii. das putride Gift, &c., Dorpat, 1866-72.

WELLS, S.—Med. Times and Gazette, vol. i., pp. 93, 483, 1872.

WILKE—Berl. klin. Wchnschr., Bd. ix., 1872.

Wo.rFr—Archiv f. pathol. anat., Bd. Ixxxi., pp. 193-277, 385-420, 1880.
53 Lbid., Bd. xcii., p. 252., 1883.

ZAHN—Zur Lehre von der Entziind, &c., Heidelberg, 1872.
ZIEGLER—Text-Book of Pathological Anatomy, pt. i., General, cap. Xxxx.,
London, 1883.
ZIEMACKI—Ztschr. f. Heilk., Bd. iv., p. 89, 1883.
ZULzeR—Arch. f. exper. Path. u. Pharmakol., Leipzig, Bd. viii., p. 133, 1878.
as u. SONNENSCHEIN—Berl. klin. Wehnschr., Bd. vi., 1869.
ZWEIFEL—Ztschr. f. physiol. Chem., Strassburg, Bd. vi., pp. 386-421, 1882.

SPIRILLUM.’
SPIROCHATA DENTICOLA AND S. OBERMEYERI.

ALBRECHT, R.—Deutsches Arch. f. klin. Med., Leipzig, Bd. xxix., pp. 77-112,
1881.
ArRNDT—Archiv f. pathol. anat., Bd. Ixxix., p. 76, 1880.

1 See also ‘‘ Cholera.”

160 APPENDIX.

Carter, H. V.—Lancet, vol. i, 1877.
Lbid., vol. i., p. 84, 1879.
Lbid., vol. i., p. 662, 1880,
Spirillum Fever, London, 1882,
Trans. Internat. Med. Cong. London, vol. i., p- 334, 1881.
Coun—Beitr. z. Biol. d. Pflanz., Breslau, Bd. ii., 1876,
» Deutsche med. Wehnschr., Berlin, Bd. v., p. 189, 1879.
», U. WARNERING—Beitr. z. Biol. d. Pflanz., Breslau, Bd. i., 1870.

GERHARDT —Ztschr. f. klin. Med., Berlin, Bd. vii., p. 372, 1884.
HEYDENREICH—Die Parasiten d. Riickfalltyphus, Berlin, 1877.
Kocu—Deutsche med. Wchnschr., Berlin, Bd. v., 1879.

Moczakowsky—Deutsches Arch. f. klin. Med., Leipzig, Bd. xxiv., 1877.
MiuiuatisEr—Archiv f. pathol. anat., Bd. xcvii., 1884.

OBERMEYER—Centralbl. f. d. Med. Wissensch., Berlin, Bd. xi., 1873.
PEL, P. K.—Ztschr. f. klin. Med., Berlin, Bd. ix., p. 22.

WriGErT—Deutsche med. Wchnschr., Berlin, Bd. ii., 1876.
Wei1_—Zur Aetiologie der Infectionskrankheiten, Bd. i., p. 18, 1881.

SPONTANEOUS GENERATION.

Bastran—Centralbl. f. d. med. Wissensch., Berlin, Bd. xiv., p. 521, 1876.
95 Compt. rend. Acad. d. sc., Paris, t. Ixxxiii., 1876.
Burpon-SANDERSON—Natute, vol. viii., p. 478, 1873.

Coun—Vortrag geh. a der 47, Versamml. deutsch. Naturf. u. Aerzte zu Breslau,

24 Sept. 1874.
CRIVELLI e Macci—-Estratto d. Rendiconti del Reale, 1st, Lombardo, Ser. 2,

Bd. i., ii., iti., Milano, 1868.

DonnéE—Compt. rend. Acad. d. sc., Paris, t. Ixiii., 1866.
Ibid., t. Ixiv., 1867.

Led
EHRENBERG—Abhandl. d. k. Akad. d. Wissensch., zu Berlin, Jahrg. 1830, 1832,
1834, 1835, 1871.

GSCHEIDLEN u. Putzeys—Arch. f. d. ges. physiol., Bonn, Bd. ix., p, 163, 1874.

Hvizinca—Arch. f. d. ges. physiol., Bonn, Bd. vii, p. 549, 1873.
Ibid. Ba. viti., pp. 277) 551, 1874.
Ibid., Bd. x., p. 62, 1875.

”
Pasteur—Ann. de chim. et phys., Paris, 3 s., t. lxiv., 1862.
Compt. rend. Acad, d. sc., Paris, t. 1., 1860.

Ibid., t. li, 1860.
Lbid.} t. Iv., 1862.

LITERATURE. 101

PoucuEer—Heétérogénie ou traité de la générat. spont., Paris, 1859.
PoucneT et HouzEau—Compt. rend. Acad. d. sc., Paris, t. xlvii., p. 982, 1858.

SAMUELSON—Arch. f. d. ges. physiol., Bonn, Bd. viii., pp. 277-288, 1874.
SCHRODER u. v. DuscH.—Ann. d. Chem, u. Pharm., Bd. lxxxix., pp. 232, 243, 1854.
y ibid., Bd. cix., p. 35-
sy Lbid., Bd. cxvii., p. 273.
ScHULZE, F.—Ann. d. Phys. u. Chem., Bd. xxxix., p. 487, 1836.
ScHWANN—Ann. d. Phys. u. Chem., Bd. xli., p. 184, 1837.

TUBERCULOSIS.

ALBRECHT—Arch. f. Kinderh., Bd. v., p. 202, 1884.

ANDREW, J.—Lancet, vol. i., pp. 693, 785, 833, 1884.

AUFRECHT, E.—Centralbl. f. d. med. Wissensch., Berlin, Bd. xx., 1882.
oe A Deutsche med. Wchnschr., Berlin, Bd. viii., 1882.

Bases—Centralbl. f. d. med. Wissensch., Berlin, Bd. xxi., p. 145, 1883.
BaLoGH—Wien. med. Wchnschr., 1882.
BanG—Deutsche Ztschr. f. Thiermed., Bd. xi., p. 45.
BAUMGARTEN—Berl. klin. Wehnschr., Bd. xvii., 1879.
9 Centralbl. f. d. med. Wissensch., Berlin, Bd. xix., pp. 274, 342,

517, 1881.
* Lbid,, Bd. xx., 1882.
55 Jbid., Bd. xxi., pp. 562, 753, 1883.
55 Lbid., Bd. xxii., p. 369, 1884.
59 Deutsche med. Wchnschr., Berlin, Bd. viii., 1882.

Ztschr. f. klin. Med., Berlin, Bd. vi., p. 61, 1883.
BEnexe—Wien, med. Bl., Bd. v., pp. 1258, 1293, 1882.
BizzozERo—Centralbl. f. ds med. ‘Wissensch., Berlin, Bd. xi., p. 292, 1873.
Bock —Archiv f. pathol. anat., Bd. xci., p. 434, 1883.

BOLLINGER—Arch, f. exper. Path. u. pharmakol., Leipzig, Bd. i., p. 356, 1873.

35 Centralbl. f. d. med. Wissensch., Berlin, Bd. xxi., p. 600, 1883.
3 Cor.-Bl. f. schweiz. Aerzte, Basel, 1874.
3 Deutsche Ztschr. f. prakt. Med., Leipzig, Bd. ii., 1876.

Prag. med, Wchnschr., 1884.
BoucHarn, CH. Cae, hebd. de méd., Paris, 2s., t. iv., pp. 673, 689, 721, 737,
801, 817, 1867.
BouLry—La nature vivante de la contagion, Contagiosité de la tuberculose,
Paris, 1884.
BRuNET—Compt. rend. Acad. d. sc., Paris, t. xciii., p. 447.
Bunt—Lungenentziindung, Tuberkulose und Schwindsucht, Miinchen, 1874.
BuRDON-SANDERSON—Practitioner, London, vol. xxix., 1882.
BuRDON-SANDERSON and KLEIN—Reps, Med. Off. Local Gov. Board, 1882-83.

CHAUVEAU—Bull. Acad. de méd., Paris, t. xxxiii., p. 1007, 1868.
Rev. scient., Paris, 1874.
Cueyne, W.—Brit. Med. Journ., vol: i., p. 507, 1883.
me Nature, vol. xxvii., p. 563, 1883.
“3 Practitioner, London, vol. xxx., pp. 241-320, 1883.
L

162 APPENDIX.

CHIARI—Wien. med. Presse, 1883.
CLark, A.—Med. Times and Gazette, vol. i., pp. 346, 99, 426, 1867.
CiarK, J. W.—Nature, vol. xxvii., p. 492, 1883.
CocuET—Compt. rend. Soc. de biol., Paris, 7 s., t. v., 1883.
CoHNHEIM— Uebertragbarkeit der Tuberculose, Berlin, 1877.
CRAMER— Sitzungsb. d. phys.-med. Soc. zu Erlang., 1883.
CREIGHTON—Brit. Med. Journ., vol. i., 1885.
% Lancet, vol. i., 1885.
aa. Trans. Path. Soc., London, vol. xxxili., p. 428, 1882.
DEJERINE—Rev. de Méd., Paris, t. iv., 1884.
DETTWEILER u. MEISSEN—Berl. klin. Wchnschr., Bd. xxi., 1883.
DIEULAFOY et KRISHABER—Atrch. de physiol. norm. et path., 3s., t. 1., p. 424,
1883.
DRESCHFELD—Brit. Med. Journ., vol. i., p. 304, 1883,

EuHRLICH—Deutsche med. Wchnschr., Berlin, Bd. viii., 1882.
55 Lbid., Ba. ix., 1883.

ErnsT—Boston Med. Surg. Journ., vol. cix., 1883.

Ewart, W.—Brit. Med. Journ., vol. i., pp. 333, 69, 415, 53, 93, 530, 69, 1882.
5 Lancet, vol. i., pp. 383, 426, 70, 515, 56, 95, 637, 1882.

FLEMING, G.—Brit. and For. Med.-Chir. Rev., vol. liv., p. 461, 1874.
Fou.is—Glasgow Med. Journ., n. s., vol. vii., p. 291, 1875.
Fox, WiLson—Trans. Med. Chir. Soc. London, vol. lvi., p. 399, 1873.

i Trans. Path. Soc., London, vol. xxiv., p. 28, 1873.
FRANTZEL u. BALMER—Berl. klin. Wehnschr., Bd. xx., 1882.

es Ibid., Bd. xxi., 1883.

GAFFKY—Mittheil. aus d. k. Gesundheitsamte, Bd. ii., Berlin, 1884.
GrrLacH—Archiv f. pathol. anat., Bd. li., p. 294, 1870.
GisBes, H.—Lancet, vol. i., p. 771, 1883.
GRADLE and WoLTMANN—Med. News and Libr., Phila., 1883.
GRANCHER—Compt. rend. Soc. de biol., Paris, 1872.
Dict. Encycl. d. Sc. méd., Paris, 3 s., t. viii., p. 289, 1880.
Trans. Internat. Med. Gane, London, vol. i., p. 293, 1881.
Green, T. H.—Brit. Med. Journ., vol. i., p. 193, 1883.

35 Lancet, vol. i., pp. 813, 1065, 1882.
Lbid., vol. ii., p. 1022, 1882.

ne Med. Times and Gazette, vol. ii., pp. 600-54, 1874.
GUTTMANN—Berl. klin. Wehnschr., Bd. xx., 1882.

a”

Heron, G. A.—Lancet, vol. i, p. 188, 1883.
H1LLeR—Deutsche med. Wchnschr., Berlin, Bd. viii. 1882.

Ins—Arch. f. exper. Path. u. Pharmakol., Leipzig, Bd. v., p. 169, 1876.

Jaccoup—Curabilité et traitement de la Phthisie Pulmonaire, Paris, 1881.
Joune—Fortschritte d. medicin, Bd. iii., 1885.

Kast—Archiv f. pathol. anat., Bd. xcvi., p. 489, 1884.
Kieps—aArch. f. exper. Path. u. Pharmakol., Leipzig, Bd. i., p. 31, 1873.

LITERATURE. 163

K.Lesps—Arch, f. exper. Path. u. Pharmakol., Leipzig, Bu. xvii., p. 1, 1883.
$5 Archiv f. pathol. anat., Bd. xliv., p. 242, 1868.
KLeIn—Practitioner, London, vol. xxvii., p. 81, 1881.
Kocu—Berl. klin. Wchnschr., Bd. xx., 1882.
sf ‘Deutsche med. Wchnschr., Berlin, Bd. ix., 1883.
5 Die tiologie der Tuberculose, Berlin, 1882.
ae Mittheil. aus d. k. Gesundheitsamte, Bd. ii., Berlin, 1884.
ae Verhandl. d. Cong. f. innere Med., Wiesb., Bd. i., p. 56-79, 1882.
KuNDRAT—Wien. med. Presse, 1883.

Lanpouzy, L.—Journ. d. conn. méd. prat., Paris, 3 s., t. iv., 1882.

Lanpouzy et MarTIN—Rev. de Méd., t. iii., p. 1014, 1883.

LreBerT—Bull. Acad. de méd., Paris, t. xxxii., p. 119, 1866.
LEuUBER—Sitzungsb. d. phy.-med. Soc. zu Erlang., p. 58, 1883.
LEvinskY—Deutsche med. Wchnschr., Berlin, Bd. ix., 1883.

LryDEN—Ztschr. f. klin. Med., Berlin, Bd. vii., 1884.

LicHTHEIM—Fortschritte d. medicin, Bd. i., 1883.

Lustic, AL.—Wien. med. Wchnschr., 1884.

LypTIN and FLEMING—Vet. Journ., London, vol. xvii., pp. 159, 241, 327, 1883.

MAcNAMARA—Brit. Med. Journ., vol. ii., pp. 1119, 80, 1883.

MALASSEz et VIGNAL—Arch, de physiol. norm. et path., 3 s., t. ii, p, 369, 1883.
55 3 Compt. rend. Acad. d. sc., Paris, t. xcvii., p. 1006, 1883.

Mariin, H.—Rev. de Méd., Paris, t. ii:, p. 289, 1882.

MrissL—Wien. med. Wchnschr., 1884.

MUL_ER—Centralbl. f. Chir, Leipzig, 1884.

MusGRAVE-CLAvE—Etude sur la contagiosité de la Phthisie Pulmonaire, These
de Paris, 1879.

NEELSEN—Centralbl. f. d. med. Wissensch., Berlin, Bd. xxi., p. 497, 1883.
OrtTH—Archiv f. pathol. anat., Bd. Ixxvi., p. 217, 1879.

Parrot et MarTIN—Rev. de Méd,, t. iii., p. 809, 1883.

Peris—Lehrb. d. allgem. Pathologie, 1877.

PFEIFFER—Berl. klin. Wchnschr., Bd. xxi., 1883.
ri Deutsche med. Wchnschr., Berlin, Bd. ix., 1883.

Pottock, J. E.—Lancet, vol. i., pp. 398, 442, 530, 583, 717, 1883.

PowELL, R. D,—Brit. Med. Journ., vol. ii., p. 698, 1884.

PRUDDEN—Med. Rec., N. Y., vol. xxiii., p. 645.

Purz—uv. d. Beziehungen der Tuberculose d. Menschen. z. T. der Thiere, Stutt-
gart, 1883.

RaNsoME, A.—Brit. Med. Journ., vol. ii., p. 1221, 1882.
Raymonp—Arch. gén. de méd., Paris, 7 s., t. xi., 1883.
KINDFLEISCH—Archiv f. pathol. anat., Bd. Ixxxv., p. 71, 1881.

si Deutsches Arch. f. klin. Med., Leipzig, 1874.
Rosin, CH.—Dict. de Méd., 13th ed., Paris, 1878.
RosENSTEIN—Centralbl. f. d. med. Wissensch., Berlin, Bd. xxi., p. 65, 1883.
Ruprert—Archiv f. pathol. anat., Bd. Ixxii., p. 14, 1878.

SaBourin-- Ztschr. f. Heilk., Bd. iv., p. 89, 1883.

164 APPENDIX.

Scumtpt—Chicago Med. Journ., vol. xlv., p. 561, 1882.
SCHOTTELIUS—Archiv f. pathol. anat., Bd. xci., p. 129, 1883.
Smit, R. S.—Bristol Med. Chir. Journ., vol. i., 1883.
Sprina—Studien iiber Tuberculose, Wien, 1883.

E Wien. med. Presse, 1883.
STERNBERG—Med. News and Libr., Philadelphia, 1882.
STRASSMANN—Archiv f. pathol. anat., Bd. xcvi., p. 319, 1884.
STRICKER—Vorl. ii. allgem. exper. Pathologie, Wien, 1880.
Sutron—Trans. Path. Soc., London, vol. xxxv., p. 477, 1884.

TAPPEINER—Atchiv f. pathol. anat., Bd. Ixxxii., p. 353, 1880.

’ Deutsches Arch. f. klin. Med., Leipzig, Bd. xxix., p. 595, 1881.
‘ToussaINT— Compt. rend. Acad. d. sc., Paris, t. xciii., pp. 350, 741, 1881.
Treves—Brit. Med. Journ., vol. i., p. 675, 1881.

VERAGUTH—Arch. f. exper. Path. u. Pharmakol., Leipzig, Bd. xvi., p. 261, 1883.
55 Berl. klin. Wehnschr., Bd. xxi., 1883.

ViGNaL—Compt. rend. Soc. de biol., Paris, 7 s., t. v., 1883.

VILLEMIN—Etudes sur la Tuberculose, Paris, 1869.
si Union méd., 3 s., t. xxxi., pp. 495, 505, 520, 1881.

VircHow—Berl. klin. Wchnschr., Bd. xviii., 1880.

WarcGunin—Archiv f. pathol. anat., Bd. xcvi., p. 366, 1884.
WEBER—Brit. Med. Journ., vol. i., p. 684, 1874.
WECHSELBAUM—Wien. med. Jahrb., p. 169, 1883.

West, S.—Lancet, vol. i., pp. 168, 679, 1883.

= Trans. Path. Soc., London, vol. xxxiv., p. 26, 1883.
WILLIAMS, C. T.—Lancet, vol. ii, pp. 135, 175, 269, 315, 1883.
- Trans. Internat. Med. Cong. London, vol. ii, p. 164, 1881.

WILLIAMS, Dawson—Trans. Path. Soc., London, vol. xxxv., p. 413, 1884.
Wotrr—Archiv f. pathol. anat., Bd. lxvii., p. 234, 1876.
Woop and ForMAD—Nat. Bd. of Health Bull. Wash., Suppl. No. 7, 1880.

ZIEGLER —Volkmann’s Sammlung klin. Vortrage, No. 1§1, 1878.
Z1EHI.— Deutsche med. Wehnschr., Berlin, Bd. ix., 1883.

TYPHOID AND TYPHUS.
A.mauist, E.—Nord. med. Ark., Stockholm, Bd. xiv., 1882.
‘BRANTLECHT—Archiv f. pathol. anat., Bd. Ixxxiv., P. 80, 1881.

Coats—Manual of Pathology, p. 256, London, 1883.

ErertH—Archiv f. pathol. anat., Bd. Ixxxi., 1880.
¥3 Lbid., Bd. |xxxiii., 1881.
Eprincer—Beitrage z. pathol. Anat., Bd. ii., Prag, 1880.

GeiceL—Deutsches Arch. f. klin. Med., Leipzig, Bd. xxv., p. 257, 1880.

Hanot, V.—Rev. de méd., Paris, t. i., 1881.
HEYDENREICH—St. Petersb, med. Wehnschr., 1876.

LITERATURE. 165
KLeps—Archiv f. exper. Path. u. Pharmakol., Leipzig, Bd. xii, xiii, and >

xiv., 1880-81,
Kocu—Mittheil. aus d. k. Gesundheitsamte, Bd. i., Berlin, 1881.

LETZERICH—Arch. f. exper. Path. u. Pharmakol., Leipzig, Bd. ix., 1878.
3 Lbid., Bd. xiv., p. 212, 1881.
LirTen—Charité-Annalen, Berlin, 1881.

Mott and BLorE—Brit. Med. Journ., vol. ii., 1883.
MaraGHano—Centralbl. f. d. med. Wissensch., Berlin, Bd. xv., 1882.

PonFIcK—Archiv f. pathol. anat., Bd. lx., 1876.

Rappin, G.—Contrib. & l’étude des bact. de la bouche, a l'état normal et dans
la fiévre typhoide, Paris, 1881.

‘T1GRi—Compt. rend. Acad. d. sc., Paris, t. lvii., p. 833, 1863.
T1zzonI—Studi. di pat. sperim. sulla gen. d. tifo etc., Milan, 1880.

_ WERNICH— Ztschr. f. klin. Med., Berlin, Bd. iv., 1882.
Wyss, OscAar—Cor.-Bl. f. schweiz. Aerzte, Bd. xi., 1881.

ULCERATIVE ENDOCARDITIS, &c.

BRAMWELL— Diseases of the Heart, p. 377, Edin., 1884.
BrRISTOWE—Brit. Med. Journ., vol. i., 1884.

CHARCOT et VULPIAN—Gaz. méd. de Paris, 1862.
CoupLanp—Brit. Med. Journ., vol. i., 1885.

DELAFIELD and PRUDDEN—Text-Book of Pathological Histology, N. Y., 1885.

Exertu—Archiv f. pathol. anat., Bd. lvii., p. 228, 1873.
3s Lbid., Bd. \xv., p. 352, 1875.

GERBER u. BircH-HrRsCHFELD— Arch. d. Heilk., Leipzig, Bd. xvii., p. 208, 1877.
Grppes, H.—Brit. Med. Journ., vol. i., p. 902, 1884.
GoopHarT—Trans, Path. Soc., London, vol. xxxi., p. 70, 1880.

Bs Tbid., vol. xxxiii., p. 52, 1882. :

HerperG— Archiv f. pathol. anat., Bd. Ivi., p. 407, 1872.
33 Die puerperalen u. pyzemischen Processe, Leipzig, 1873.

Jaccoup—Art. “ Endocarditis” in Nouveau Dict. de Med., Paris.
Kiers—Arch. f. exper. Path. u. Pharmakol., Leipzig, Bd. vi., 1877.
Kocu—Mittheil. aus d. k. Gesundheitsamte, Bd. i., Berlin, 1881.

KorEsTER—Archiv ff. pathol. anat., Bd. Ixxii., p. 257, 1878.

MaGILi.—Brit. Med. Journ., vol. ii, 1884.

166 APPENDIX.

Os_eR—Brit. Med. Journ., vol. i., 1885.
35 Trans. Internat. Med. Cong. London, 1881.

ROSENSTEIN—Ziemssen’s Cyclopzedia, vol. vi., p. 70.
SouTHEY—Trans, Clin. Soc., London, vol. xiii., 1880.
VircHow—Archiv f. pathol. anat., Bd. lvi., p. 415, 1872.

WILKs—Brit. Med. Journ., 1882.

VACCINIA.

BucuNER—Eine neue Theorie ueber Erziehung von Immunitét gegen Infections-
krankheiten, Miinchen, 1883.

BuRDON-SANDERSON—Reports on the Intimate Pathology of Contagion.

CHAUVEAU—Compt. rend. Acad. d. sc., Paris, t. Ixvi., 1868.

Coun —Archiv f. pathol. anat., Bd. lv., 1872.

Cory, R.—Rep. Med. Off. Local Gov. Board, 1881.

Furst—Cor.-Bl. d. arztl. Kreis-u. Bezirks-Ver. im Kénigr. Sachs., Leipzig,
t. xxxiii.

Guirin—Bull. Acad, de méd., Paris, 2s., t. ix., p. 1008, 1880.
HaMERINK—-Ueber die sogenannte Vaccination und Variola, Prag, 1884.

Jacozs—Presse méd., Paris, t. xxvii., 1875.
JosceT—Compt. rend. Acad. d. sc., Paris, t. xcii., p. 1522, 1881.

KvesBs—Arch. f. exper. Path. u. Pharmakol., Leipzig, Bd. x., p. 222, 1879.
KLEIN—Phil. Trans., Roy. Soc., London, 1874.

KrBer—Archiv Ff. pathol. anat., Bd. xlii., 1868.

LueinpuHL—Verhandl. d. phys.-med. Gesellsch. in Wiirzb., 1873.

Masse—Des inoculations Préventives dans les Maladies Virulentes, Paris, 1883.

Pisstn—Berl. klin, Wehnschr., 1874.
PouL-Pincus—Vaccination, Berlin, 1882.

Quist—St. Petersb. med. Wechnschr., 1883.

SALMON ~ Med. Rec., N. Y., vol. xxii., p. 370, 1883.

STEVENS, H.—Rep. Med. Off. Local Gov. Board, 1881.

srrauss, M.—Journ. Roy. Micr. Soc., London, 2 s., vol. ii., p. 661.

WEIGERT—Anat. Beitr. z. Lehre v. d. Pocken, 1874.

ZULzeR—Berl. klin. Wchnschr., 1872.

INDE X.

INDE xX:

PAGE

Abbe’s Illuminator, ‘ 48
Acetic Acid, . 27, 30, 31, 37
Achlya Apiculata, 124
», Polyandra. 124
Acids, . : ‘ 25
»» Hydrochloric, 31, 43

», Nitric, 31, 42
Actinomyces, Literature of, 32

Action of Heat, Germicidal, .
Acute Abscess, . . Z . 7:

Agar-Agar, Sterilised, 97
Air Capsules, Appearances in, 90
», Examination, Hesse’s Apparatus, 90
», Hot, Chamber, a7
> Jars, 85
x» Jelly in Capsules for testing, 88

,, Micro-Organisms in, Literature of,
Aitken’s Test-’ ili 113
Alcohol, 25
Alkalies, 25
‘ Ammoniacal Fermentation, 108
Aniline Colours, Classification of, . 32, 52
» Oil Water, + 355 52

Animals, Diseases of, Literature of,
Animal Infusions, Cultivation i an}.
Method of Inocula-

141
107

”

tion, 107

i Preparation of, 106

es Sterilisation of, 107
Anthrax Bacillus, . 14, 16, 30, 36, 128
6 se in Jelly, A 84

a Literature of,
Antiseptics, Literature “of,
Apparatus, Hesse’s, for Air Examina-
tion, i é
used in examining ‘Water,

”

Apparatus and Reagents, List of,, . Sr
' Appearances in Air Capsules, 90
of Micro-Organisms, 25, 26
Artificial Cultivation Fluids, . 110
Aspergillus Albus, . 65, 122
a Flavescens, . 2) 3523
a Fulvus, 123

an Fumigatus, 12
5 Glaucus, 123
i Nigrescens, . 17, 69, 123
Repens, 67, 122
Atmosphere, Germs in, . : 21
Bacilli, Asexual reproduction in, II
», of Leprosy, ¥ , 38, 129
3, Special Stains for, ¥ 37

PAGR
Bacilli, Typhoid, 37
Bacillus Anthracis, Tay 16, 30, 36 128
“3 a5 in Jelly, 84
es Butyris, 109
ie Proliferation of, 10
$3 Subtilis, . 128
a of Glanders, 37
$5 of Tubercle, . 9, 12, 14, 16, 128
Methods of Staining and
Mounting—
Baumgarten’s, 26
Ehrlich’s, 40
Gibbes’, 43
Kaatzer’s, ji 43
Koch’s, . 3 - 38, 39
Rind fleisch’s, 42
Bacillus of Blue Milk, ‘ . 129
Py Fluorescing, 81, 129
vs Malaria, : i 129
“ Mouse Septiczemia, 129
- Tubercle on Blood Serum, 104
ye Violet, P 81, 129
Bacteria, Coloured, Literature of, 139
Bacterial Fermentation, . 13
Bacterium Lactis, . 109, 127
5 Lineola, 127
39 Termo, 126
93 Xanthinum, . 127
Balsam, Canada, 32
Baumgarten’s erining Method, 26
Becker, ‘ 86
Bergamot Oil, 32
Black Torula, ‘ 125
Blood Jar, Method of Preparation of, 98
Blood Serum, Inoculation of, 103
33 Preparation of, Summary, 102
5 Solidified, 98
- Sterilised Fluid, 1069
a5 Testing of, 102
Tubercle Bacillus on, 104
Blue Milk Bacillus, 129
Bread Paste, Inoculation of, 68
33 Preparation of Sterilised, 63, 72
Buchner’s Experiments, . 1g
ey Fluid, 108
Bulb, Sternberg’s, 114
Butyris Bacillus, 109
Cagniard-Latour, I
Canada Balsam, 32, 35
Carbolic Spray, 77, 80
Carmine, : 33

170 INDEX.

PAGE PAGE
Caseation, F 11 | Fermentation, Ammoniacal, 108
Caseation and Digestion, i 12 er Bacterial, 13
Caseous Material, . i z 2 9 Literature of, 143
Cedar Oil, F 32 Ferments, Action on Tissues, . 13
Cells, Giant, , ‘ II oF Digestive, 12
», Proliferation of, 10, 11, 13| Fevers, Specific, ed

Charbon, Literature of, 133 | Films on Cover Glasses, Preparation of,
Chemical Excreta of Bacteria, P II 26, 36, 40
* Tubercle Bacilli, 9 | Flask, Lister’s, 112
Chemical Inhibition, . % 3 16} ,, Stock, for Koch's ‘Jelly, ‘ 75
y; Reagents, 24, 25, 30 Withdrawal of Jelly from, 89
Chloroform, 25, 27, 30| Fluid, Blood Serum Sterilised, 109
Cholera, Literature of, - 139] 4, Buchner’s, : 108
Classification of Aniline Colours, ‘ 32] ,, Cohn’s, 110
Cleansing of Hands, 60, 69,94| ;, Miquel’s. 110
Clove Oil, 32| ,, Pasteur’s, 110
Cohn, . : 31, ‘90, 108, 109] ,, Raulin’s, » Io
Cohn’s Fluid, . 41] Fluids, Micro- -Organisms i in, - 24, 45

Coloured Bacteria, Literature of, 139 » or Tissues, Summary of Process
Colours, Classification of Aniline, : 32 of Examination, 53
Composition of Micro-Organisms, 20 | Fluorescing Bacillus, 81, 129
Contrast Stains, .* 40, 42} Frankland, 10

Corpuscles, Compound Granular, 44| Fresh Préparation, "Examination of, 46, 47
Corrosive Sublimate, - 38 | Funnel, Hot Water, 74
Cotton Wadding Plugs, . 64
Croupous Pneumonia, . 29 | General Aspects, . : . < I
Cultivation Fluids, Artificial, 110 », Literature, J 146
95 in Animal Infusions, 107 | Germicidal Action of Heat, 56
os Liquid, Advantages of, 106 | Germs carried by Currents, 7O
i of Micro-Organisms, 22 », Gravitation of, 68, 79
An Me Micro-Orgauisms in », Reaction on Tissues, 22
Solid, ‘ é ‘ 46 », in Atmosphere, 21
55 Nutrient, ‘ : 55 »» in Water, Chemical Estimation of, 97
Solid, Advantages of, 55 in Wounds, 5 21
Currents, Germs carried by, 70 Giant Cells, < IL
Glanders Bacillus, . 37
Darby’s Meat and Gelatine, 77 5 Literature of, . 141
Darwin, . 3 10|Gliacocci, . 29
Dead Tissues, Separation of Micro- Gram’s Method of Staining, 35
Organisms from, . . 118] Granular Corpuscles, i 44
Depressed Vitality of Tissues, . 4| Granulomata, . 5 13°
Detection of Micro-Organisms, 24| Grape Juice, Sterile, 110
Differentiation of Micro-Organismsfrom Gravitation of Germs, 68, 79
Organic and Inorganic Particles, 25, 26, | Gonorrhoea, Literature of, 148
27, 30 Micro- -Organistns of, 39
Digestion and Caseation, . 12 Growth, Rate of, Micro- -Organisms in
Digestive Ferments, 12 Culture Media, 14
Diphtheria, Literature of, 140 5% <3 Micro-Organisms in
Diplococcus, 28 Tissues, 14
Discharges, Separation of Micro- -Organ-
isms from, . 118 | Hematoxylin, , Z ‘ ‘ 33
Diseases of ‘Animals, Literature of,. 141] Hands, Cleansing of, 60, 69, 94
Distribution of Tubercle Bacilli, 9 | Hardening of Tissues, 47
Division of Micro- Rie ere Tee 28 Heat, Germicidal Action of, 56
Duclaux, 12,17| ,, Sterilisation by Discontinuous, 76
by Dry, . 77
Ehrlich’s Staining Method, . 35 Hesse’s Apparatus for Examination of
Endocarditis, Ulcerative, Literature of, 165{ Air, 3 =

Error, Sources of, in Observation, .
Erysipelas, Literature of,
Ether, . ‘ ‘

44
142
25, 27, 30

His’s Method of Staining and Washing “6
Hot Air Chamber, . . 77

INDEX.

PAGE

Hot Water Funnel, 74

Hydrophobia, Literature of, 148
Illumination, Method of, 48
Incubator, . 1S
Infusions, Animal, Cultivation i in, . 107
* ea Method of Inocula-
tion, 107
a es Preparation of, . 106
, », _ Sterilisation of, . 107
a Vegetable, ‘
Inhibition, Chemical, 16
Inoculating Needles, Platinum, 62
Inoculation, . 5 23
as of Animal Infusions, . 107
ee of Blood Serum, 103
wi of Bread Paste, . 68

of Gelatine in Test-Tubes, 79
of Sterilised Potatoes, 62
Inorganic Particles, » 25, 29
Inspissator for Serum, 2 Iol
Instruments, Sterilising of, . » 118
Invasion of Tissues by Micro-Organisms, 4
through Lymphatics, 15

si through Veins, . 15
Investigation, Conditions necessary for, 22
Todine, .

Isolation of Micro- Organisms, . 22, 23
Jar, Method of preparing Blood, 98
Jars, Air, . 88
Jelly, Appearances of Water Culti-
vations in, : 9
>, Bacillus Anthracis in, $4, 128
», Darby’s Meat, : 77
: Inoculation of, in Test- Tubes, 79
», in Capsules, for testing Air, . 88
>, Meat and Sugar, 76
», Mixed Growths in, 86
»» Osteo-Myelitis in, . 86
sy Penicillium Glaucum in, 87, 121
>, Pink Yeast in, : 86
:» Preparation of Koch’s Nutrient, 72

Reactions of Micro-Organisms in, 82
Stock-Flasks for, 5
Withdrawal from Stock- “Flasks, 89

. 16, 76
Knives, Preparation of Potato, 59
Koch, . = Ty EA, 23931, 33
Koch's Method of examining Water, 93
Nutrient Jelly, Preparation of, 72
Stock-Flasks for, 75

Klein,

”

” ”

Lactis, Bacterium, F z :

Leprosy Bacillus, . . : 38, 129
a Literature of,

“ Liquid Cultivation Media, Advan-

tages of, 104
List of Apparatus a and Reagents 51
Lister, . I, 109
Lister’s Flask, 112

171
PAGE
Literature of Actinomyces, - 132
¥ Anthrax, . 133
35 Antiseptics, 136
ea Bacteria, Coloured, 139
5 Charbon, 133
_ Cholera, 139
ay Diphtheria, . 140
ag Diseases of Animals, . 141
a Glanders, « 4r
as Pleuro-Pneumonia, 141
ei Swine Plague, 141
- Erysipelas, 142
» Fermentation, 143
5a General, 146
5 Gonorrheea, 148
9 Hydrophobia, 148
Pr Leprosy, 149
Pa Malaria, 149
is Methods, 150
a5 Micro-Organisms in Air, 150
5 ud in Liv-
ing Tissues, 15
oy Osteo-Myelitis, 152
9 Pneumonia, 152
55 Putrefaction, 143
sg Pyzmia, 153
' Spirocheeta Denticola, 160
" i Obermeyeri, 160
o Spontaneous Generation, 160
eo Syphilis, 148
“ Tuberculosis, 161
Re Typhoid Fever, . 165
A Typhus 165
‘ta Ulcerative Endocarditis, 165
a Vaccinia, 165
Living Tissues, Micro- -Organisms in,
Literature of, 151
- Separation of Micro-
Organisms from, 117
Lymphatics, Growth of Micro-
Organisms in, d is : 29
Macroscopic eas of Micro-
Organisms, . 23

Maddox's Method of examining Water, 92

Malaria, Bacillus of, 129
aa Literature of, 149
Materials, Nutrient, 16
Meat and Sugar Jelly, 76
Media, Mounting, . 32, 35
Method, Baumgarten’s Staining, 26
- Gram’s 5 35

sp Weigert’s + 33
Methods, Literature of, . 150
- of Mounting, 35
Metschnikoff, .° 11
Micrococci in Pus, 7, 28
» Pyogenetic, . 130
Micrococcus of Gonorrheea, 39
a Osteo-Myelitis, 130

na Pneumonia, 39

172 INDEX
Z PAGE PAGE
Micrococcus Prodigiosus, 129 | Mounting, Methods of, for Photo-
‘3 Tetragonus, 28] Micrography, — . : 50
Uree, : 108 | Mouse, Selene of, . 16
Micro-Organisms, Appearances of, Bacillus of 129
in Fluids, 25, 26, 45 Mavements of Micro-Organisms, 45
55 Composition of, Mucor Lichtheimii, 4, 12
on Cultivation, . a x» Mucedo, 123
ss Detection of, 24| ., Stolonifer, : 124
ss Destruction by own Multiplication of Micro- -Organisms,
Products, . 17 Evidence of, i 28
35 Differentiation from Mutability of Species, Micro- Organisms, 18
Organic and In- Mycoderma Aceti, . TIO, 126
organic Particles,
25, 26, 27, 30| Naegeli, A 19) 29, 45
a Evidence of Multi- Nutrient Cultivation Media, 55
plication, 28 a Jelly, Koch’s, . 72
oh Growth ‘in Vessels, a Materials, - : 16
Lymphatics, &c. 29 9 er Aspergillus Nigres-
_ in Air, Literature of, 150 cens, . 17
7 in Animal Fluids, . 24 oe Fe Penicillium Glau-
5 in Living Tissues, cum, . . 18
Literature of, 151
PA in Solid Cultivation Oil of Bergamot, . . : 32
Media, 46| ,, of Cedar, . 32
53 Invasion of Tissues, 4,15] ,, of Cloves, . 32
Ne Isolation of, 22 | Organic Particles, . 4 25, 29
9 Macroscopic Appear- Osteo-Myelitis in Jelly, . 86
ances of, 23 55 Literature of, 152
i Means of ‘Ingress to + Micrococcus ‘of, 130
Body, 4
¥e Tissues, 8] Pasteur, . 7 :. 12, 45, 109
ae Modification of Func- Pasteur’s Fluid, a ES
tion, ‘ 19| Penicillium Glaucum, 18
Be Movements of, e 45 ee in Jelly, 87, 121
” Mutability of Species, 18 Penospora Infestans, . : 124
a Rate of Growth in Photo-Micrography, F - j 49
Culture Media, 14 a Mounting Reagents
Pe >» Tissues, 14 for, 50
+a Reaction to Staining Stains for, 50
Reagents, 31| Pink Yeast, foe , 125
3 Reactions in Jelly, 82 Pipettes, Sterilised Glass, ‘ 78
ee at on Tissues, 22] Platinum Wire Needles, Sterilising ‘of, 62
35 Recognition in Tissues, 27 | Pleuro-Pneumonia, Literature of, 141
wa Relations to Disease, 2| Plugs, Cotton Wadding, 64
as Tissues, 315,23 Pneumonia, Croupous, 29
a Requirements of, 53 Literature of, 152
‘0 Reversion to Type, 6 ‘5 Micrococcus of, 39
ey Selective Affinities, 16| Poisoning, Putrefactive, . 15
33 Separation of, from 33 Septic, . a 5 : 15
$s Dead Tissues, 118] Potash, Caustic, 25, 26, 27, 30, 31
- » Living ,, 117 | Potassium, Carbonate, . : 7 31
45 Summary of Process Potato Fungus, 124
of Examination for, 53 », Jars, Preparation ‘of, 58
Miflet, . 90 » Knives, - 59
Milk, ‘Sterilised, 108 | Potatoes, Inoculation of Sterile, 62
Miquel’s Fluid, IIL 5 Preparation of Sterilised. . 56, 62
Mixed Growths in Jelly, 86 | Preparation ot Films on Cover Glasses, 26

Modification of Function, Micro-
Organisms,
Mounting Media,

a Methods of,

‘ 19
32, 35, 53
. 35

Products, Destruction of Micro-Organ- ,

isms by own, 7
Proliferation of Bacilli, 10
sii of Cells,

10, 11, 23

INDEX.

PAGE |

Pus, ‘ ‘ ‘ i ‘i 8
»» Micrococci in, - 7
Putrefaction, Literature of, 143
Putrefactive Poisoning, 15
Pyzemia, . i 13, 14
55 Literature of, 153
Pyogenetic Micrococci, 130

Ransome’s Method of examining Water, 92
Raulin’s Fluid, - 17, 18, 110

Reaction of Micro-Organisms in Jelly, 82
Reagents and Apparatus, List of, 51
» Chemical, 24, 25, 30, 38
» Staining, : 31
Recognition of Micro- -Organisms in
Tissues, : 27
Relations’ of Micro - Organisms to
Disease, . 2
“4 of Micro - Organisms to
Tissues, . 3,6, 8, 9, 22, 23
Reproduction, Asexual, of Bacilli, . IL
Requirements of Micro-Organisms, . 20

Reversion of Micro-Organisms to Type, 19

Salmon Fungus,

Saprolegnia lerax, 124
Sarcina, ‘ ¥ a6

45 Ventriculi, ‘ 28, 126
Schwann, ‘ 4 ‘ I
Sections, Treatment of, . 26

Sediment from Water, Examination of, 92
Selective Affinities of Micro-Organisms, 16

173
PAGE

Staining Methods—
Baumgarten’s, 26
Fr edlaender’s, 39
Gram’s, 35
His’s, . 46
Klein’s, 39
Koch's, . 38, 39
Schutz’s, . : ‘ 37
Weigert’s, : 33

Stain'ng Reagents —
Bismarck Brown, 33 34» 36, 53
Carmine, 32
Chrysoidin, 33
Dahlia, 33
Eosin, 36
Fuchsin, 32, 35, 38, 39
Gentian Violet, 33 34, 35
Hematoxylin, 33
Magenta, . 32
Methyl Blue, 335 34, 37, 38
» Green, 33
», — Violet, 2 - 33, 34

Picro-Carmine, ‘

Vesuvin, 33, 36, 38
Stains, Contrast, . 40, 42
», for Special Bacilli, 37
5 Micrography, 50

Standard Vitality of ers : 4

Steam Steriliser,

Sterilised Agar-Agar, .
ee Bread Paste, Preparation of, és
ai Cheese Infusion, . 109

Separation of Micro-Organisms from ” Fluid Blood Serum, 109

Living Blood, 117 9 Glass Pipettes, 78

$5 of Micro-Organisms from 5 Grape Juice, . 110

Discharges, . 118 is Jelly, Koch’s, . 72, 76

$5 of Micro-Organisms from - Milk, 108

Hung Solid ani 117 4 Platinum Wire Needles, 62

Septicaemia, . 6, 3 54 Potatoes, 56

3 of Mouse, , "% $5 Inoculation of, . 62

95 Bacillis aE, a 53 Urine, 108

Septic Poisoning, F ‘i 15 Vegetable Infusions, 110

Serum, Inoculation of, 103 Sterilisation ad Discontinuous Heat, 76

s, Inspi-sator, I0l by Dry Heat, 77

», Solidified Blood, , 98 Steriliser, Slow, 99

», Sterilised Fluid Blood, 109 - Steam, 57

» _ Testing of Blood, 102 | Sterilising of Blood Serum, 109, 102

Slow Steriliser, . 99 of Instruments, 118

Smith’s, Angus, Method of examining Sternberg’ s Bulb, 114

Water, “9 97 | Stock-Flasks, “ 5

Soda, Caustic, : 25 3 Withdrawal of Jelly from, 2

Soft Sore Virus, F 7 6 Streptobacteria,

Solidified Blood Serum, < 98 | Streptococcus, 38

Sources of Error in Observation, 44 | Sublimate, Corrosive, 38

Special Bacilli, Stains for, . : 37 | Sugar and Meat Jelly, 76
Specific Fevers, 7 | Summary of Process of Examination

Spirochzeta Denticola, Literature of, 160| of Fluids, &c. for Micro-Organisms, 53

¥ Obermeyeri, Ss 160 | Swine Plague, Literature of, . I4L

25 | Syphilis, Literature of, . 148

Spontaneous Generation, Literature of, 160
Spray, Carbolic, . 78, 80

Test-Tube, Aitken’s,

174 INDEX.
PAGE PAGE
Test-Tubes, Inoculation of Jelly j in, 79 | Urine, Sterilised, 108
Thermostat, A we SEES
Tissue Reaction, 10 | Vaccinia, Literature of, . 166
Torula, . : 110 | Vegetable Infusions, - ro
» Black, 125 | Vessels, Growth of Micro- oc ala
» Cerevisize, 125 ae : 29
» Pink, 125 | Violet Bacillus, . ‘81, 129
Treatment of Sections, 3s 26 | Vital Reaction of Tissues to Micro-
Tubercle Bacillus on Blood Serum, 104] Organisms, 4, 8
Tuberculosis, 5
53 Bacillus of, 95 12, 4, 16, 128 | Ward, Marshall, 10
ain Distribution of, 9 Water Cultivations, Appearances i in
a Literature of, 161 Gelatine, 4 96
os Methods of Staining— \ », Examination of, . 92
Ehrlich’s, : 40! 4, 5 Angus Smith’s
Gibbes’, 43 Method, 94, 77
Kaatzer’s, 431 95 ‘ Apparatus used, 94
Koch’s, . 38, 39) ,, ss Koch’s Method, 93
Rindfleisch’s, 42) 4, ma Maddox’s ,, 92
Turpentine, . , 32 ie Pe Ransome’s ,, 92
Tyndall’s Method of Steriisation, 76, 99 | Weigert, 15, 31, 35
Typhoid Bacilli, : ‘ 37 | Wounds, Germs in, : 21
S55 Literature of, 165
Typhus, Literature of, 165 | Xylol, 32
Ulcerative Endocarditis, Literature of, 165} Yeast, . 125
Urez, Micrococcus, oe - 108} Yeast, Pink, in Jelly, 86

Edinburgh: Printed by Scott & Ferguson, and Burness & Company,
Printers to Her Majesty,

YOUNG J. PENTLAND’S PUBLICATIONS.

Royal 8vo, cloth, price 255., illustrated with 226 Wood Engravings and 68 pages of
Lithograph Plates, exhibiting 91 Figures—317 [lustrations in all,

DISEASES OF THE HEART AND THORACIC AORTA.

By BYROM BRAMWELL, M.D., F.R.C.P.Ed.,

Lecturer on the Principles and Practice of Medicine and on Practical Medicine and Medical Diagnosis in
the Extra-Academical School of Medicine, Edinburgh; Pathologist to the Edinburgh Royal
Infirmary ; Additional Examiner in Clinical Medicine in the University of Edinburgh.

ALSO BY THE SAME AUTHOR,

Second Edition, Rewritten and Enlarged, with 183 Illustrations, 8vo, cloth, 16s.

THE DISEASES OF THE SPINAL CORD.

Second Edition, 8vo, cloth, illustrated with 162 Coloured Plates, mostly from
Original Drawings, price 245.

PRACTICAL PATHOLOGY:

A MANUAL FOR STUDENTS AND PRACTITIONERS.

By G. SIMS WOODHEAD, M.D., F.R.C.P.Ed.,

Demonstrator of Pathology in the University of Edinburgh ; Pathologist to the Royal Hospital
for Sick Children; late President of the Royal Medical Society.

8v0, illustrated with 408 Engravings, and 4 Analytical Tables, drawn on Wood
by the Author. LRrice tos. 6d.

TEXT-BOOK OF GENERAL BOTANY.
By Dr. W. d. BEHRENS.

Translation from the Second German Edition.

Revised by PATRICK GEDDES, F.R.S.E,

Demonstrator of Botany in the University of Edinburgh,

YOUNG J. PENTLAND’S PUBLICATIONS.

18o, cloth, price 5s. 6d.

GERMAN-ENGLISH MEDICAL DICTIONARY.

By JOSEPH R. WALLER, M.D.

Fcap 8vo, cloth, price 35. 64.
SYNOPSIS OF CHEMISTRY:

INORGANIC AND ORGANIC.

By T. W. DRINKWATER, F.C.S,
Member of the Society of Analysts ; Lecturer on Chemistry in the Edinburgh School of Medicine.

Ln the Press, impl. ato, illustrated with 30 Plates from Original Paintings,

ATLAS OF VENEREAL DISEASES.

By P. H. MACLAREN, M.D., F.R.C.S.E.,

Senior Assistant Surgeon in Charge of the Lock Wards, Royal Infirmary, Edinburgh;
Examiner in the Royal College of Surgeons, Edinburgh.

Tn the Press, 2 vols. large 8vo, illustrated with 750 Figures,

THE PARASITES OF MAN,

AND THE DISEASES WHICH PROCEED FROM THEM.

A TEXT-BOOK FOR STUDENTS AND PRACTITIONERS.

By Professor RUDOLF LEUCKART.

Translated from the German, with the co-operation of the Author,

By WILLIAM E. HOYLE, M.A. (Oxon.), M.R.C,S., F.R.S.E.

EDINBURGH: YOUNG J. PENTLAND, 11 Tevior Praog,

pa
ete tae
AN

Tak i q
TG
se

Dhl

iit
aa he
Hie